Agfeo AS 190 plus/AS 191 plus Operation Manual

Introduction

I

Basic-Line plus: AS 140 plus

AS 141 plus

AS 190 plus

AS 191 plus

- Operation

- Programming

I - 1

I

Introduction

Overview of functions

These operating instructions describe how to operate the AS 140 plus, AS 141 plus, AS 190 plus and AS 191 plus telephone systems. Please refer to the following list for the differences between them.

AS AS AS AS

140 plus 141 plus 190 plus 191 plus

External ISDN basic access

Internal ISDN basic access

Internal ISDN basic access, extendable with plug-in S0-module 110

Ports for analog terminals only

System telephones digital ST 25, ST 30 for internal ISDN basic access -

Door hands free unit (FTZ 123 D 12) - TFE -

Ports for bell buttom

Switching relays - with/without dorr hands free unit (TFE)

-

x

4

1

-

-

-

2

-

-

4

1

1

-

1

3

2/4 x

8

1

-

2

1

3

2/4

-

8

1

1

Features of the telephone system ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Call waiting announcement / call waiting protection / rejection of call waiting announcement

Call list display *

Don't disturb for internal and external calls

Point-to-point or point-to-multipoint connection

Automatic exchange seizure adjustable

Automatic dialling - connection without dialling

Busy on busy

CLIP, displaying the caller´s number on analog phones

Code call

Computer telephony integration (CTI)

Direct call (baby call)

External call access (5-level)

Remote support, remote software download

Remote control, e.g. changing diversion

Flash time adjustable for every analog port

Call charge evaluation with TK-Bill

Picking up calls from an answering machine

Fetching external and door calls

Internal / external conference

Telephone system configuration by telephone or PC

Remote configuration

Least Cost Routing (LCR) with automatic fallback

Memory for storing phone numbers *

Network code -Call by Call *

Parking external calls

Room inquiry / muting

Internal and external room monitoring

Relay switching (AS 190 plus, AS 191 plus)

Reserving a dial-up line

Inquiry / brokering

Callback

Call rhythms for incoming external calls, 5 adjustable

Call forwarding, programmable and switchable

Speed dial variant for analog and ISDN terminals

Discriminator (barred range, local range)

Day / night service, programmable and switchable

Charge unit factor, charge unit limit

TAPI interface

Telephone directory (abbreviated dialling), central for all users

Telephone lock and access codes

Timer, automatic control of functions, 10 timers

Door call diversion to external (AS 190 plus/AS 191 plus)

Diversion from (Follow me)

Diversion to internal and external users

Support of multilink-compatible cordless telephones

Print of connection charges

Post-sending of connection costs to analog telephones

Redial simple / extended / automatic *

Internal / external music on hold

Internal and external forwarding

Appointment call / Wake up call *

* system telephones only

ISDN features that the telephone systems support ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Call forwarding (permanent, on busy, if no answer)

Call forwarding per port on a point-to-point access

Call forwarding during the signalling phase

Three-party conference

Direct inward dialling

Identifying malicious callers (malicious caller tracing)

Placing a connection on hold

Multiple subscriber numbers (MSNs)

Parking (hot swapping)

Callback on busy

Phone number communication / suppression to the caller

Phone number communication / suppression to the called party

Communication of connection charges during and at the end of a connection

I - 2

Introduction

I

Overview of contents

- Overview of functions

- Safety notes

- Table of contents

- Important notes on using analog and ISDN terminals

- CTI - computer telephony integration

- Pictograms and keys

- Basic functions - "telephone calls", "accepting a call" and "forwarding a call"

- Convenience functions of the telephone system in alphabetical order

Introduction

I

Operation

Analog / ISDN terminals

1

- Basic functions - "telephone calls", "accepting a call" and "forwarding a call"

- Convenience functions of the telephone system in alphabetical order

Operation

System telephones

2

- Programming from a PC

The TK-set configuration program is part of the

TK-Soft software package. The corresponding

3.5" diskettes are included in delivery.

- Programming from a system telephone

- Programming from a analog telephone

- Remote configuration by a specialist dealer

- Downloading new firmware

- Glossary

- If something should go wrong

- Ringing and tones

Programming

3

Annex

4

List of key words

L

I - 3

I

Introduction

Safety notes

The telephone system is intended for connection to an ISDN basic access (DSS 1).

You may connect all analog terminals to the analog user ports of the telephone system that you are also permitted to operate on the analog telecommunications network.

You may connect all DSS 1 ISDN terminals to an internal S0 bus (AS 141 plus, AS 191 plus) that you are also allowed to operate directly on the ISDN network. Two digital

AGFEO system telephones can be also connected to every internal S0 bus.

Connected door hands free units must conform to the respective interface definition.

Any other use of the telephone system is not in accordance with its intended purpose and is therefore not permitted.

The telephone system has a general connection permit (Germany: AAE).

Safety notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!

- The telephone system conforms to the prescribed conformity and safety regulations.

- Attention! The telephone system must be electrically earthed. Therefore connect the

Euro PE contact plug of the power cable only to an expertly installed socket (PE socket) to prevent danger to persons and material.

- Before connecting the subscriber lines to the subscribers and the ISDN network, pull out the 230 V mains plug to switch off the telephone system.

Mortal danger!

- Protective measure! Touch the metal shield of the PC/printer socket of the telephone system briely with your finger. This will discharge any possible electrostatic charges, thus protecting the telephone system's electrostatically sensitive components.

- You must not connect and disconnect subscriber lines during a thunderstorm.

- Lay subscriber lines in such a way that no-one can step on them or stumble over them.

- Prevent the ingress of liquid into the telephone system as otherwise short-circuits may occur.

- No liability can be assumed for consequential damages such as the cost of an unintentionally continued connection.

- The telephone system is out of operation whenever power failures occur. You cannot make telephone calls in such cases.

I - 4

Introduction

I

Contents

Introduction

Overview of functions

Overview of contents

I -2

I -3

Safety notes

Contents

I -4

I -5

Important notes on using analog terminals

I -8

Important notes on using ISDN terminals I -9

CTI - computer telephony integration I -10

Pictograms and keys

System telephones

I -11

I -11

Chapter 1 -Operation - analog /

ISDN

Making telephone calls

Accepting calls

Forwarding a call

1 - 1

1 - 4

1 - 6

Call waiting announcement / Callback / Call list 1 - 8

Call waiting prevention

Picking up calls

1 - 10

1 - 11

Do not disturb - tone ringing off

Switching over the call variant

1 - 12

1 - 13

Activating or deactivating call variant 3

(internal call forwarding) 1 - 14

Announcement 1 - 15

Autodial - connecting without dialling 1 - 16

Busy on busy on / off 1 - 17

Announcement / Intercom system function

Placing a connection on hold

1 - 18

1 - 19

Identifying malicious callers (Malicious call tracing) 1 - 20

Conference 1 - 21

Least Cost Routing (LCR) – Cost-optimized telephoning 1 - 23

Parking an external call

Room monitoring

Relay switching

Inquiry / brokering

1 - 24

1 - 26

1 - 28

1 - 29

Callback on busy

Tariff units factor

1 - 31

1 - 32

Phonebook - storing and dialling phone numbers 1 - 33

Telephone lock - direct call (baby call) 1 - 35

Activating/deactivating timers 1 - 37

Diverting a door call to an external subscriber 1 - 38

Switching over the door call variant 1 - 40

Actuating a door intercom system and a door opener 1 - 41

Communicating a caller’s phone number on the internal S0 bus 1 - 42

Communicating your phone number 1 - 43

Follow me - diverting calls from other telephones 1 - 44

Diversion to - diverting calls to another telephone 1 - 45

Connection data set - Setting and printing the printout 1 - 50

Displaying connection costs on an analog telephone 1 - 52

Connection costs - Defining a limit 1 - 53

Connection costs - Print and delete totals

1 - 54

I - 5

I

Introduction

Chapter 2 - System telephone operation ST 25

System telephones ST 25

Setting up and cleaning the system

2 -1 telephones, inserting the marking strips 2 -2

System telephone display 2 -3

System telephone settings 2 -4

Function keys - freely programmable functions (overview)

Function key assignments

Making telephone calls

2 -10

2 -12

2 -17

Accepting calls

Forwarding a call

2 -21

2 -23

Forwarding an outside line

Call waiting announcement (knocking)/

2 -25 callback

Call waiting prevention

Picking up calls

Call list

2 -26

2 -28

2 -29

2 -31

Do not disturb - turning off tone ringing

2 -33

Switching over the call variant

Activating or deactivating call variant 3

2 -35

(internal call forwarding)

Forwarding a call during ringing

Announcement

2 -37

2 -38

2 -39

2 -40

Autodial - connecting without dialling 2 -41

Activating/deactivating busy on busy 2 -42

Voice message/intercom system function

2 -43

Placing a connection on hold 2 -46

Identifying malicious callers (malicious call tracing)

Conference

2 -47

2 -48

Least Cost Routing (LCR) – Cost-optimized telephoning 2 -51

Brokering - switching between several conversations

Memory - storing a phone number

Network code - Call by Call

Parking an external call

2 -52

2 -53

2 -54

2 -55

Room monitoring

Relay switching

Inquiry

Callback on busy

2 -56

2 -57

2 -58

2 -59

Successively viewing status messages 2 -60

Entering user names 2 -61

Storing phonebook numbers

Phonebook - dialling numbers

2 -62

2 -66

Telephone lock - emergency/direct (baby call) 2 -68

Appointment call - non-recurring appointment 2 -70

Activating/deactivating timers 2 -72

Switching over the door call variant 2 -73

Diverting a door call to an external subscriber 2 -74

Actuating an intercom system and door opener 2 -75

Communication your phone number 2 -76

Diversion from - diverting calls of other telephones

Diversion to - diverting calls to another

2 -77 telephone 2 -78

Displaying and deleting connection costs

Printing connection costs

Connection costs - displaying your own

2 -82

2 -83 costs 2 -84

I - 6

Introduction

I

Connection costs - Starting and stopping recording for certain users 2 -86

Redial - dialling a phone number again 2 -87

Wake up call - recurring appointment 2 -88

Destination dialing - Storing and dialing phone numbers 2 -90

Chapter 3 - Programming

Programming from a PC 3 - 1

Programming from the system telephone or a/b telephone 3 - 2

Determining what you want to program

3 - 5

Connection type/External phone numbers/

Call variants 3 - 10

Setting the ringer rhythm for incoming external calls 3 - 14

Door intercom – Door phone number/Door call variants 3 - 15

Internal phone numbers for analog ports

3 - 17

Terminal types for analog ports 3 - 18

Programming the internal phone numbers and terminal types for the internal S0 port

3 - 20

Relays

External access /Barred numbers

3 - 22

3 - 24

External access 3 - 25

Local network code

Internal phone number offset

3 - 26

3 - 27

Music on Hold (MoH) 3 - 28

Switch box – Internal phone number 3 - 29

Regional numbers (free range)

Barred numbers

3 - 30

3 - 31

Protecting telephone system functions against unauthorized use (code number)

Adjusting the flash time

3 - 32

3 - 36

Einstellung des Gebührenimpulses

Maintenance/testing

3 - 37

3 - 38

Registering the system telephone ST 25 digital 3 - 40

Remote setting - remote configuration 3 - 41

Downloading new firmware 3 - 42

Programming for advanced users

3 - 42

3 - 44

Programming tree 3 - 45

Chapter 4 - Annex

Glossary 4 -1

If something should ever not function 4 -3

What to do in the event of malfunctions 4 -4

Rings

Tones

4 -6

4 -7


L - 1

I - 7

I

Introduction

Important notes on using analog terminals

You may connect all approved analog terminals to the analog parts of your telephone system that you are also permitted to operate on the public telecommunication network. These may be normal telephones (a/b telephones), answering machines, group 2 and 3 fax machines and analog modems, for instance.

The dialling method employed by the analog terminals may consist of the pulse dialling method or of the dual tone multifrequency method (DTMF). DTMF is the faster dialling method. The telephone system detects the respective dialling method automatically.

From an analog terminal, you can reach any internal user free of charge by dialling the appropriate internal phone number. You reach an external subscriber after seizing a exchange code

0

and the external phone number.

If you set "automatic exchange line seizure"

R key (hash key) before the internal phone number. Internal dialling is not possible on telephones, particularly telephones using the

R key or which do not support these functions.

system by pressing the

S key (star key) and by dialling a code digit. On telephones, dialling method that do not have a

S key or

99

instead of the

S key.

Please note: for the "inquiry" function, standard analog telephones using DTMF must have a signal key (inquiry key ) with the flash function.

This instruction manual always specifies the operating steps for standard analog telephones set to DTMF. On standard analog telephones set to pulse dialling, you do not need to press the r key when making an inquiry.

You can also use the functions of a standard analog telephone (e.g. redial, abbreviated dialling) in conjunction with your telephone system. Please refer to the operating instructions for the telephone concerned for details of these functions.

Details of how to operate the functions of your telephone system that you are able to use from a standard analog telephone set to

DTMF are given in this instruction manual and in the "short-form operating instructions for analog and ISDN terminals".

When operating your telephone system, pay attention to its audible signals. You hear the acknowledgement tone when you have successfully completed a code digit procedure. Otherwise, you will hear the error tone.

The telephone system communicates the counting pulses to analog terminals featuring a display of connection charges (charge pulses).

Modem - Data transmission speed up to

56600 bps, reduction possible by transmission path and cables to 33600 bps.

For usage of a modem, it is recommended to define the port for "automatic line seizure" by Tk-Set. Otherwise it is imperative to configure the modem to blind dialling because most modems do not detect the dial tone of a telephone system. On modems that operate with the Hayes command set, blind dialling is set by means of the

X0..X4 parameters.

I - 8

Introduction

I

Important notes on using ISDN terminals

The telephone systems AS 141 plus and AS

191 plus are already equipped at the factory with an internal S0 access.

The telephone systems AS 140 plus and AS

190 plus can be upgraded to AS 141 plus or

AS 191 plus systems later with the S0 module 110 (internal S0 access).

You may connect up to eight ISDN terminals to one internal S0 access of the telephone system.

ISDN terminals:

- AGFEO system telephones digital

- ISDN telephones

- ISDN cards

- ISDN fax machines

Depending on current consumption, you may connect at least four ISDN terminals that do not have a power supply of their own.

Example: 4 ISDN telephones or 2 system telephones digital and 2 ISDN telephones.

All ISDN terminals must be approved ISDN terminals (DSS 1).

The internal S0 access behaves like a pointto-multipoint connection to which you may assign any chosen internal phone numbers of the telephone system. The two-digit internal phone numbers are the multiple subscriber numbers. You enter one or several of these multiple subscriber numbers

(internal phone numbers) in your ISDN terminal. In doing so, pay attention to the

ISDN terminal’s operating instructions. The multiple subscriber number is this ISDN terminal’s internal and direct inward dialling number.

From an ISDN terminal, you reach any internal user free of charge by dialling the corresponding internal phone number. After seizing a dial-up line (B channel), you reach exchange code

0


If you set "automatic exchange line seizure" internal number you must press the

R

key

(hash key) before dialling the internal terminals that do not have a

R

key or which do not support these functions.

On an ISDN telephone, you operate the functions of the telephone system in the

You execute a function after pressing the key (star key) and dialling a code digit.

On ISDN telephones that do not have a

S key or which do not support these functions, you must enter the digits

99 instead of pressing

S

key.

key r

on the ISDN telephone.

When operating your telephone system, pay attention to its audible signals. You hear the acknowledgement tone when you have successfully completed a code procedure.

Otherwise, you hear the error tone.

The following are displayed to you on your

ISDN telephone:

- Caller’s phone number (internal and external)

- Connection charges

- Date and time after the first internal connection

You can only make restricted use of the menu-prompted functions of your telephone system for operating the ISDN features.

I - 9

I

Introduction

CTI - computer telephony integration

TK-Phone ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Among other things, the TK-Soft software package contains the TK-Phone CTI application. It offers you the possibility of dialing telephone numbers directly from a PC, of viewing calls on your monitor during your daily work and of dialing the numbers pertaining to unanswered calls from a call list. Refer to the online help, which you can call up at any time by pressing F1, for details of the entire performance spectrum.

TAPI ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Contrary to TK-Phone, the TAPI (Telephony

Applications Programming Interface) is not an independent CTI application, but an interface between a TAPI-compatible

Windows application and the telecommunications system. If programs (applications) support this interface, you can use them to control the telecommunications system. The scope of control depends on the application you are using. However, in most cases it embraces starting of outgoing calls (dialing out of the application) and displaying incoming calls.

PC e.g. database e.g. phonebook

CD-rom e.g. TAPI telephony program

TAPI application

TAPI TAPI TAPI

Microsoft telephony interface

Part of the

Microsoft operating system

TSPI

Telephony service provider for AGFEO telecommunications systems

AGFEO TSP

CAPI

ISDN card with CAPI driver Serial interface

The TAPI is an interface of Microsoft operating systems and the application end of Microsoft’s telephony interface. A telephony service provider (TSP) from the manufacturer of the ISDN hardware - in this case from AGFEO - is needed to link this interface to the AGFEO telecommunications system. The TSP is a driver that you must install on your PC. It executes the TAPI functions and controls the necessary exchange of data between the PC and the telecommunications system.

Internal ISDN bus

Serial interface

TAPI-compatible system software

AGFEO ISDN telecommunications system

Owing to the constantly growing scope of functions of applications that support TAPI, the TSP is undergoing constant expansion.

We provide the TSP free of charge on our

Internet home page http://www.agfeo.de to ensure that you always have the current TSP for your needs.

The self-extracting file contains all information needed for installation and relating to the supported applications. If you do not have an Internet access, contact your specialist dealer.

I - 10

Introduction

I

Pictograms and keys

Operation of every function of the telephone system is explained clearly and lucidly with the aid of pictograms.

Pictograms ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A h

Z

Q

Audible ringing signal

(tone ringing)

Pick up the receiver

Enter phone numbers or code numbers

Tones you can hear in the receiver, e.g.

acknowledgement tone

T

ª

K

®

Conduct a call

Replace the receiver

Conference

Room monitoring by telephone

Keys ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

r

Inquiry key (signal key) for making an inquiry during a call

S

Star key for initiating specific functions

9

Digit keys for entering digits, e.g. "9"

R

Hash key for internal dialling when automatic exchange line seizure is active.

System telephones

You can use system telephones for easy and comfortable operation of your AGFEO ISDN telephone system.

There is a choice of two different models.

- Digital ISDN system telephone ST 25

- Digital ISDN system telephone ST 30

The digital ISDN system telephones ST 25 and ST 30 can be connected to any internal

ISDN bus of an AGFEO.

Up to two ST 25 or ST 30 can be operated on an internal ISDN access of your AS 141 plus and AS 191 plus.

The S0 module must be plugged in order to be able to connect an ST 25 or ST 30 to an

AS 140 plus or AS 190 plus.

For usage of ST 30 read the separate manual „Digital added value ST 30“.

I - 11

I

Introduction

I - 12

Operation - analog / ISDN terminals

1

Making telephone calls

On your telephone, you can set the outside line seizure "0" variant or the automatic outside line seizure variant to seize an outside line (to seize a B-channel).

Outside line seizure "0" variant

("as-delivered" setting): after picking up the receiver, you hear the internal dial tone.

If you wish to call an external subscriber, dial

"0" to seize an outside line. When you wish to call an internal user or initiate a procedure, enter the internal phone number or a code.

Automatic outside line seizure variant: after picking up the receiver, you hear the telephone system’s external dial tone. If you wish to call an external subscriber, simply enter the external phone number. The outside line is seized automatically. If you wish to call an internal user, you must predial

R

.

Direct outside line seizure variant: this variant can only be set by means of the PC configurator. It is suitable for terminals that only operate external connections, e.g. a fax machine or a modem. When you pick up the receiver, you hear the dial tone of the exchange. The outside line is seized directly.

Enter the external phone number. In this variant, you fcall any internal users and you cannot initiate any procedures.

Every internal user of your telephone system can be assigned two different two-digit internal phone numbers (first and second internal phone numbers) by programming. If necessary, inquire which internal phone numbers have been assigned to which users.

Setting the outside line seizure variant ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS51PZ

0 = outside line seizure with "0"

1 = automatic outside line seizure

QPª

Lift handset Enter the outside line seizure code with internal set variant

Acknowledgement tone

Replace handset

Making telephone calls - outside line seizure variant "0" ("as-delivered" setting) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h QP0 Q PZ

External phone call

Lift handset Outside line External dial Enter the external phone

Internal dial tone seizure with

"0" tone number port – After the code "

10

" has been

"

0

") , the telephone system also seizes an outside line. However, it assigns the fax line is seized by dialling"

0

", the telephone service is assigned.

number or multiple subscriber number, MSN is sent to the ISDN exchange. The connection costs are then recorded under this phone number.

This phone number is also transferred to a called ISDN subscriber providing that communication of your phone number is released.

Communicating your phone number – In the case of outside line seizure with “0“ the external phone number of the telephone system assigned to you (system phone

How to account the connection costs under another MSN, see under "Outside line seizure with specific MSN".

1 - 1

1


When you make telephone calls via a pointto-point connection , the system phone number and your extension number are

Internal call communicated to a called ISDN subscriber, provided communication of your phone number is enabled.

h QPZ

Lift handset

Internal dial tone

Enter internal phone number

Making a telephone call - automatic outside line seizure variant ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

External call h QPZ

Lift handset Enter external phone

External dial tone number

Automatic outside line seizure is only possible directly after picking up the receiver. If you wish to call an external subscriber in an standard MSN is always communicated to the called party. Targeted communication of a different MSN is not possible.

pressing "

0

".

When seizing an outside line automatically on a point-to-multipoint connection, the

Internal call

Combined port: the telephony service is transmitted when "automatic outside line seizure" is set.

h QPR Q PZ

Lift handset

External dial tone

Press the hash key

Internal dial tone


Making a telephone call - direct outside line seizure variant

(without internal dialling) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

External h QPZ call

Lift handset

Enter external phone number Dial tone of the exchange

When using the "Direct outside line seizure" variant, only external dialling is possible, but not internal dialling.

When using the "Direct outside line seizure" variant on a point-to-multipoint connection, the standard MSN is always communicated to the called party. Targeted communication of a different MSN is not possible.

Combined port: the telephony service is transmitted when "direct outside line seizure" is set.

1 - 2


1

Seiting an outside line wiht a defined MSN (outside line seizure variant "0")

When dialling externally, you may define the call charges. To seize the outside line, wich MSN is trasfered, in order to seperate dial the following procedure instead of "0".

h PS00PZ PRPZ PT

Lift handset Prepare external dialling

Enter specific

MSN

Terminate entry

Enter external phone number

Conduct call

Reserving an outside line ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

If you hear the busy tone after seizing an outside line (e.g. by dialling "0"), this means that both outside lines are busy. You can as an outside line is free, the telephone system will call you. When you pick up the receiver, you hear the external dial tone and reserve an outside line for yourself. As soon you can enter the external phone number.

h P0QPrS29 Q Pª

Lift handset

Outside line seizure, e.g. "0", busy tone. No outside line free.

Reserve outside line Acknowledgement tone

Replace handset

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Outside line access (external access)

If, when seizing an outside line, you hear the error tone instead of the external dial tone, this means that your telephone has no external phone number dial access.

Barred range - If the telephone system’s barred range is programmed for your telephone, this means that you cannot dial the external phone numbers that lie within the barred range. You hear the error tone.

Internal call - Internal dialling is not possible on telephones for which automatic outhave a

R

key (hash key) or which do not support this key.

DTMF post-dialling is possible for all existing external connections, even in an inquiry when brokering and during a three-party symbols (

1

...

0

,

S

and

R

) .

You can agree two different code calls with internal users of radio cells (base stations with cordless telephones. The connection must be programmed as a "radio cell").

When you dial the radio cell with the first internal phone number, all users of the radio cell are called with the tone ringing sequence of code call 1. When you dial using the second internal phone number, they are called with code call 2. The first user of the radio cell who picks up the receiver is connected to you.

Reserving an outside line - The telephone system rings you for 60 seconds when the reserved outside line is free. The reservation is cleared after one minute if no connection comes into being.

If you hear the error tone after reserving, this means that the outside line is already reserved.

support a

S

key (star key), you must press the digits

99

instead of the

S

key.

1 - 3

1


Accepting calls

Thanks to different ringing rhythms on your telephone, you can distinguish between internal calls, code calls, door calls and external calls provided your terminal supports the different ringing rhythms.

When your telephone rings and you pick up the receiver, you are connected to the caller.

You can end the call at any time by replacing the receiver.

Call waiting announcement - You receive a call while you are already making a call. The waiting call is announced. You hear the internal call waiting announcement tone once

(internal call) or you hear the external call waiting announcement tone several times

(external call). You can accept the call and you can broker between both calls.

You can reject an external waiting call. When you reject the waiting caller, the caller hears the busy tone.

You are called ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A Ph PT

Lift handset

You are conducting a call and you hear the external or internal call waiting tone

End the call

Conduct the call Your telephone rings

Call waiting ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

TQPª A Ph PT

Conduct the call Automatic ringing by the waiting party

Lift the receiver

External call waiting (free outside line) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

TQPr PS8PT

You are conducting a call and you hear the external call waiting tone

Inquiry, call is placed on hold

Fetch the waiting external call

Conduct the call

Internal call waiting ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

TQPr P0 PT

You are conducting a call and you hear the internal call waiting tone

Inquiry, the call is placed on hold

Fetch the waiting internal call

Conduct the call

1 - 4


1

Rejecting an external waiting call ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

TQPr PS21PT

You are conducting a call and you hear the external call waiting tone

Inquiry, the call is placed on hold

Reject the waiting call

Continue your call

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You hear the error tone while fetching a waiting call,

- if the internal call waiting tone refers to the other call partner.

- if both outside lines of the external waiting caller are busy. To speak with the waiting caller, you must end the first call

(replace the receiver or place the first call on hold by means of the inquiry function).

You can prevent call waiting announcement by activating call waiting announcement prevention.

1 - 5

1


Forwarding a call

You can forward an external call to another internal user or to an external subscriber.

Two kinds of internal forwarding are possible.

Internal forwarding with announcement

You call the internal user in an inquiry, you announce the external call and you replace the receiver. You have now forwarded the external call.

Internal forwarding without announcement

You call up the internal user in an inquiry and you replace the receiver without speaking with the internal user. The internal user hears call ringing, and is connected to the external subscriber after lifting the receiver.

External forwarding

is only possible with an announcement. You call the external subscriber in an inquiry and you announce the other external call. You forward the call by dialling the appropriate call.

Internal forwarding with announcement ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

T Pr PZ PT Pª

Forward external call Conduct external call

Inquiry, external call is placed on hold


Announce external call

Internal forwarding without announcement ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

T Pr PZ Pª

Conduct external call

Inquiry, external is placed on hold


Forward external call

External forwarding ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

T Pr P0 PZ PT P

Inquiry, external call is placed on

Seize outside line Conduct first external call hold rS20 Pª


Conduct second external call

Forward first external call


1 - 6


1

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

When forwarding an external call , you entering "

0

", even if automatic outside line seizure is set on the telephone.

External forwarding is only possible if a dialup line (B-channel) is free.

forward this external subscriber to another internal user.

If the internal user is busy or has activated the do not disturb feature on his telephone, you are connected back to the external subscriber after a short busy tone.

You bear the cost of the externally forwarded call.

During the inquiry, the external subscriber on hold hears a tune if you have internally activated music on hold (MoH) or if music on hold is fed in from an external source.

A user on the internal S0 bus can only forward an external call internally if the second

B channel of the internal S0 bus is free. External/external forwarding is not possible.

Internal forwarding with announcement

If the internal user does not answer, you are after dialling r0

. If necessary, you can

After internal forwarding without announcement, you receive a call back after

45 seconds if the internal user has not accepted the forwarded call within this time. If you accept the call back, you are again connected to the external subscriber. Ringing is aborted after 60 seconds if you do not accept the call back.

1 - 7

1


Call waiting announcement / Callback / Call list

By means of Call waiting announcement , you can make yourself noticeable to a busy internal user. You hear the internal call waiting tone. In his call, the other user hears the internal call waiting tone. Your required call partner receives your call immediately after hanging up.

If he does not accept your call or if he has activated call waiting protection, you initiate a callback when you replace the receiver.

You receive the automatic callback as soon as the other user is free again. Your telephone rings. You only need to pick up the receiver and the other user will be called automatically.

If you call an internal user who has a system telephone that is free but who is not answering, you can enter yourself in the call list of this user’s system telephone.

Call waiting announcement / Initiating Callback / Entry in the call list ¢¢¢¢¢

h PZ Q Pr PS19

Lift handset Dial internal phone number

Busy or ringing tone

Inquiry Call waiting announcement

Q PT

Call waiting tone or

Extension user answers, conduct call

P ª

Extension user does not answer.

Replace the receiver. This initiates a callback or you enter yourself in the call list if you have called a system telephone.

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Call waiting announcement - You cannot announce yourself as a waiting caller to an internal user

- from whom a callback is already expected.

- whose connection is set to the answering machine, fax, modem or combined unit terminal type.

You cannot initiate a callback from an internal user

- from whom another user is already expecting a callback,

- who has activated do not disturb on his telephone,

- whose connection is set to the answering machine, fax, modem or combined unit terminal type.

If you wish to repeatedly announce a waiting call to an internal user without placing a call on hold, you must announce your call again.

Callback - You can initiate several callbacks in succession (from every internal user)

Callback from a user with a standard telephone:

- The callback is cancelled after 60 seconds if you do not pick up the receiver.

- A callback is cleared once the callback has come into being.

1 - 8


1

Callback in general:

You have activated a callback:

- if you have activated do not disturb on your telephone, this is temporarily cancelled.

- if you have set call diversion on your telephone, the callback is not diverted.

- Power failure: initiated callbacks are cleared.

Call list - Callback from a user with a system telephone:

- If you do not pick up the receiver, after 60 seconds your call is entered in the call list of the user’s system telephone.

- If you are busy, your call is immediately entered in the call list.

- If the user picks up the receiver during his callback, your call is immediately entered in his call list.

You cannot use the "call waiting announcement/callback/call list" features on a combined unit (phone/fax).

1 - 9

1


Call waiting prevention

While you are conducting a telephone call, internal users and external subscribers can announce their waiting calls. You hear the call waiting announcement tone in your call.

If you do not want others to announce their waiting calls, activate call waiting prevention on your telephone. You can select whether the call waiting prevention is to apply for your 1 st internal phone number (primary internal phone number), your 2 nd internal phone number (secondary internal phone number) or for both internal phone numbers.

External callers hear the busy tone when your telephone has rung as the only one and no internal call forwarding (call variant 3) has been set.

Call waiting prevention on / off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

1 = 1 st internal h PS55PZ PZ

0 = off phone number

2 = 2 nd

internal phone number

QPª

0 = both internal phone numbers

Lift handset Call waiting prevention on / off

Select internal phone number


Replace handset

1 - 10


1

Picking up calls

Another telephone rings with the internal or door ringing tone. You can pick up the call on your telephone.

If the answering machine has accepted an internal call, you can pick up this external call on your telephone.

Un-selective pick-up of an external call ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A Ph PS8PT

Conduct call External call on another telephone

Lift the receiver on your receiver

Pick up external call

Selective call pick-up ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A Ph PS26PZ PT

Enter the code Door call on another telephone

Lift the receiver on your telephone

Key in the phone number of the internal extension.

Conduct call

Picking up a door call ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A Ph PS11PT

Conduct call Door call on another telephone


Pick up door call

Picking up an answering machine call ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

T Ph PZ PT

Answering machine has accepted external call


Enter the answering machine’s internal phone number


Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

To be able to pick up a call from an answering machine, the terminal connection must be programmed as an answering machine.

You can only pick up external calls nonselectively.

You can selectively pick up the call signalled to the selected extension.

1 - 11

1


Do not disturb - tone ringing off

You do not wish to be disturbed by calls and you activate the do not disturb feature.

You can select whether the don’t disturb feature is to apply for your 1 st internal phone number (primary internal phone number), your 2 nd internal phone number

(secondary internal phone number) or for both internal phone numbers.

You can also define whether do not disturb is to apply only to internal calls, to external calls or to all calls and you can deactivate do not disturb again.

If do not disturb is active, ringing on your telephone is off and internal callers hear the busy tone. You can continue conducting telephone calls in the usual manner. When you pick up the receiver, the special dial tone reminds you that the do not disturb feature is on.

Switching do not disturb ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

1 = 1 st internal 1 = internal calls h PS43PZ phone number

2 = 2 nd internal phone number

PZ

2 = external calls

3 = all calls

0 = off

Q

0 = both internal phone numbers

Do not disturb for

Select internal phone number

Define call type


Lift handset

Pª

Replace handset

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You can initiate callbacks despite the fact that the do not disturb feature is active. The callback temporarily cancels do not disturb.

Do not disturb is not active if you are using your telephone as a guarding telephone for room monitoring.

1 - 12


1

Switching over the call variant

In the event of an external call, a telephone rings or several telephones ring simultaneously. The called internal user who picks up the receiver first is connected to the caller.

Which telephones ring is defined by programming in the ringing distribution settings.

By means of two call variants (AVA), different ringing distribution settings are possible for the day time and night time.

You can activate or deactivate call variant 2

(night service) at any time, from any internal or external telephone, and singly for each phone number in your telephone system.

From an external telephone, to do this you must dial up the switching box of your telephone system.

When call variant 2 is deactivated, call variant 1 (day time service) is on.

Call variant 2 (night service) on / off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS53PZ

1 = on

0 = off

2 = all off

3 = all on

Lift handset Switch call variant 2 on / off

Q Pª

Enter phone number to switch individually

Conclude

input


Replace handset

Call variant 2 ( night service) from an external source on / off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PZ Q Q PZ

Lift handset Enter the direct dialling in or multiple subscriber

Ringing tone

2 to 3 rings number of the switching box

Q PS53PZ

1 = on

0 = off

2 = all off

3 = all on on / off Wate for 5 seconds internal music on

Switch call variant 2 hold if the code

Q Pª

Wait for 5 seconds internal music on hold

Enter the code number of the switching box within 15 seconds as a

Enter phone number to switch

DTMF signal

)

Conclude

input individually


Replace handset

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

If the selection ‘all off/all on’ is set up when call variant 2 is switched on/off, door call variant 2 is switched on/off at the same time.

1 - 13

1


Activating or deactivating call variant 3 (internal call forwarding)

If you activate call variant 3 (internal call forwarding), the telephone system forwards an external call to other internal terminals.

Call forwarding takes place:

- after a defined number of rings if no-one answers,

- immediately if the number is busy and call waiting announcement is not possible.

You can activate and deactivate call variant

3 (AVA 3) separately for each phone number in your telephone system, and from every internal or external telephone. From an external telephone, you must dial up the telephone system’s switching box to do this.

The call forwarding terminals are defined by programming the ringing distribution settings - call variant 3 - for each phone number in your telephone system.

Call variant 3 (internal call forwarding) on / off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS54PZ

1 = on

0 = off

2 = all off

3 = all on

Lift handset Switch call variant 3

Q Pª on / off Enter phone number to switch individually

Conclude

input


Replace handset

Call variant 3 (internal call forwarding) from an external telephone on / off

h PZ Q Q PZ

Lift handset Enter the direct dialling in or multiple subscriber number of the switching

Ringing tone

2 to 3 rings box

Q PS54PZ

1 = on

0 = off

2 = all off

3 = all on

Wait for 5 seconds

Switch call variant 2 internal music on hold if the code

Q Pª on / off


Enter phone number to switch individually


DTMF signal

Conclude

input


Replace handset

1 - 14


1

Announcement

You can make an announcement from your telephone via an audio module or a loudspeaker system.

The audio module or the loudspeaker system is connected a port for analog terminal.

Announcement ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS49 Q PT Pª

Lift handset Replace handset Enter the announcement code


Make the announcement

1 - 15

1


Autodial - connecting without dialling

You can activate "automatic dialling" on your telephone for an emergency. If you pick up the receiver and then do not press a key, after 10 seconds the telephone system automatically dials a stored external phone number.

Up to that time, you can dial any phone number in the normal fashion. In this case, automatic dialling does not take place.

Autodial on / off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS50PZ

1 = on

Q Pª

0 = off

Lift handset Automatic dialling on / off Replace handset Acknowledgement tone

Autodial - Programming a phone number ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You must start programming mode by entering h

S705

Q

ª h PS7241PZ PRQPª

Lift handset Program the autodial number Enter an external Conclude input, Replace phone number, Acknowledgement handset max 24 digits tone

Continue programming or end the programming mode by entering h

S700

Q

ª

!

Clearing the autodial phone number ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Programming mode must be started by entering h

S705

Q

ª h PS7240 Q Pª

Lift handset Clear autodial phone number Acknowledgement Replace handset tone

Continue programming or end programming mode by entering h

S700

Q

ª

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Check your autodial setting after programming the external phone number. Activate the autodial mode, lift the receiver, wait until the external phone number is dialled and check that the right connection is established.

It cancels automatic dialling after 12 attempts.

If you hear the error tone when you activate the autodial feature, no telephone number has been programmed.

If the called party is busy, the telephone system attempts to redial the external phone number every 10 seconds.

1 - 16

If the autodial feature is on, you hear the special dial tone when you pick up the receiver.


1

Busy on busy on / off

An external subscriber calls your phone number, for which ringing distribution to several terminals is programmed. The terminals that are free ring. You are busy and there is no-one there who can accept the call. The caller hears the ringing tone. To avoid creating an impression that nobody is there, you can activate the "busy on busy" feature for your phone number. A caller hears the busy tone if one user in the ringing distribution configuration is busy.

Busy on busy on / off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS46PZ PZPRQPª

0 = off

Lift handset Switch busy on busy on / off Enter the external phone number

Conclude input,


Replace handset

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

An ISDN terminal that is connected to the point-to-multipoint connection in parallel with the telephone system and which is assigned an identical phone number to that of the telephone system is always called, regardless of whether "busy on busy" is on or off in the telephone system for this phone number. The caller hears the ringing tone.

1 - 17

1


Announcement / Intercom system function

You can use your telephone system like an intercom. That is to say, you can make an announcement to one system telephone or to all system telephones in your telephone system.

The loudspeakers on the system telephones concerned are activated automatically. If automatic microphone activation is set on an solely called system telephone, it can conduct a hands free call with you. Otherwise, he must use the receiver.

You can also make an announcement out of an external call and you can forward the external call to the party receiving the announcement.

Announcement on one system telephone ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS48PZ Q PT

Lift handset Enter the announcement code

Enter the internal phone number of a system telephone



Announcement to all system telephones ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS48P00 Q PT

Lift handset Enter the announcement code

Announcement to all system telephones



Announcement out of an external call ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

T PrPS48PZ Q P

You are conducting an external call

Inquiry Enter the announcement code

Enter the internal phone number of a system telephone or 0 0 for all system telephones


T


Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You can connect back to the external subscriber after entering r0

if the announcement party does not answer or is busy.

1 - 18


1

Placing a connection on hold

Point-to-multipoint connection only -

You can have your external call placed on hold by the ISDN exchange in order to conduct an inquiry conversation with a second external subscriber on the same outside line.

While you are conducting a telephone call with an external subscriber, you wish to obtain information from a second external subscriber, for example, although no other outside line is free. You then switch back to the first call.

You can also switch between both external calls (brokering).

Placing a call on hold ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

T Pr PS60 Q PZ P

Inquiry


First external call on hold

External dial tone


T Pr PS60 T P

Conduct inquiry: Inquiry Return to first external call

Continue first external call etc.

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You cannot place a call on hold in the exchange if you hear the error tone instead of the external dial tone. You are switched entering r0

.

If you replace the receiver, you clear the current call and also the call on hold.

Call charges are incurred for the current external call and for the one on hold.

1 - 19

1


Identifying malicious callers (Malicious call tracing)

You can only use the "Identifying malicious caller" feature after placing a special order with your network carrier.

The ISDN exchange stores the caller’s number, your number, the date and the time of the call. You can trace the caller during a conversation.

Identifying a caller ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

T Pr PS14 Q Pª

Inquiry Identify caller Conduct external call


Replace handset

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You can continue the call after rS14

.

Until you continue or cancel the call with the caller, the caller hears a tune if "music on hold" (MoH) is activated in the telephone system or is fed in from an external source.

You hear the error tone:

- if you have not placed an order for identification of malicious callers with your network carrier.

- if the caller could no longer be identified by the exchange.

1 - 20


1

Conference

Conducting a conference in the telephone system

As the conference leader, you can:

- conduct a three-party conference with analog internal subscribers or with internal subscribers connected to the internal

S0-bus or

- conduct a three-party conference with one external subscriber and one internal user or

- conduct a three-party conference with two external subscribers using two outside lines.

Conducting a conference in the ISDN exchange (point-to-multipoint connection)

To establish an ISDN three-party conference with two external subscribers, you must first place the first external call on hold in the

ISDN exchange in order to conduct an inquiry call with the second external subscriber on the same outside line. You then switch both calls together in a threeparty conference.

Internal three-party conference ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

T PrZPT PrS61 QK

You are conducting an internal call

Inquiry, enter internal phone number

Conduct inquiry call

Inquiry, enter conference code Acknowledgement tone

Conference with three parties

Internal / External three-party conference ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

T Pr0ZPTPrS61 QK

You are conducting an internal or external call

Inquiry, enter "

0

" and external or internal phone number


Inquiry, enter conference code Acknowledgement tone

Conference with two internal users and one external subscriber

ISDN three-party conference ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

T Pr PS60 Q PZ P

Inquiry External dial tone Conduct external call

First external call on hold in the exchange


T Pr PS61 Q

Conduct inquiry Inquiry Code for ISDN threeparty conference


K

Three-party conference with two external subscribers

1 - 21

1


Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Conference circuit in the telephone system

An external or door call is signalled to the conference with the external call waiting tone when the called user is in the conference.

The conference leader, who at least have the privilege to accept external calls, can

.

call by entering rS11

.

During the external or door call, the conference leader is no longer in the conference.

pressing rr

provided he has not replaced the receiver.

Conference circuit in the ISDN exchange

If you hear the error tone instead of the external dial tone, it is not possible to place ing r0

, you are connected back to the external subscriber.

A three-party conference is not possible if you hear the error tone after dialling the three-party conference code.

You end the three-party conference by replacing the receiver.

Connection charges are incurred for external calls participating in the three-party conference.

If a participant replaces the receiver, he is switched out of the conference. He can only be fetched back into the conference by the rS61

.

The conference is ended when the conference leader replaces the receiver.

1 - 22


1

Least Cost Routing (LCR) – Cost-optimized telephoning

Since the opening up of the telecommunications market you can choose between various network providers and reduce your telephone costs thanks to the advantages of competition.

The Least Cost Router of the telecommunication system decides which network provider is the cheapest for your external connection on the basis of the local code you dial (tariff zone), the time of day and day of the week. Should the selected provider not offer a free line after a adjustable number of tries, the PBX automatically chooses a pre-defined alternative provider (fallback).

The network code for the current network provider is placed automatically in front of your dialed external phone number and dialed. You simply dial in the usual way.

The use profile of the Least Cost Router covers 8 network operators and 8 tariff zones with their own time of day and day of the week profile. You can enter and update the use profile with TK-LCR on the PC.

You can switch the Least Cost Routing on and off on your telephone.

Switching Least Cost Routing (LCR) on/off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS42PZ

1 = on

Q Pª

0 = off

Lift handset Code for LCR on / off


Replace handset

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You can decide which network provider is used for an external connection despite the

LCR being switched on:

The network code for the network operator is stored in the redialing.

- Simply dial the network code of the desired network provider in front of the local code.

Important! Not all ISDN features are available to all network providers at the time these operating instructions went to print

(e.g. communicating the phone number to the called party, communicating the connection costs).

- You can dial the network provider with a programmed function key "Call by Call" on the system telephone (see "Network code – Call by Call").

1 - 23

1


Parking an external call

There are two ways to park an external call:

- Park in the telecommunications system.

The outside line (B-channel) remains occupied during parking.

- Park (replug on bus) in the ISDN exchange

(only at multipoint connection). The outside line (B-channel) is freed when parking in the exchange.

Parking in the telephone system

You can briefly interrupt an external call, i.e.

you can park it in the telephone system, because you

- have to leave your place briefly,

- wish to resume the call on a different telephone in the telephone system, for example.

The outside line (B-channel) remains seized while a call is parked in the telephone system. The external subscriber hears music on hold. You receive a callback if you do not resume (unpark) the parked external call within 4 minutes.

Parking an external call ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

T Pr PS22 Q P ª


Inquiry Enter the parking code


Replace handset

The call is parked.

Resuming the external call (unparking) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS22PT

Lift handset Enter the parking code

The call is unparked.

Continue the external call.

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You can resume (unpark) the parked call at any telephone.

If several calls are parked in the telephone system, priority is assigned to unparking the first call.

If you hear the error tone when unparking, no external call is parked.

The PBX supports the menu "Park" of ISDN phones.

Connection charges are incurred for the parked call.

1 - 24


1

Parking (replug on the bus) in the ISDN exchange (only at the multipoint connection)

You can briefly interrupt an external call, parking it in the ISDN exchange, e.g. because

- you have to leave your post for a short time

- you want to continue the conversation on another ISDN telephone at the multipoint connection (bus).

- You want to unplug your ISDN telephone and replug it to another ISDN socket at the multipoint connection (bus),

- You want to continue the conversation at another analog telephone of the telecommunications system.

The outside line (B-channel) is freed when parking in the exchange.

You must continue a parked conversation within 3 minutes.

After 3 minutes the ISDN exchange disconnects the parked call.

Since several calls may be parked at your

ISDN connection, you have to identify each call with a "connection ID".

Please see the appropriate operating instructions to find out how to park and continue a call with an ISDN telephone.

Parking an external call in the ISDN exchange ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

T PrS27P Z Q Pª

Hold external call Park external call Enter connection ID

(0 to 9)

Acknowledgment tone

Replace handset

Continuing external call (unparking) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS28 P ZPT

Lift handset Hold external call Continue external call

Enter connection ID

(0 to 9)

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Parking/unparking in the ISDN exchange is not possible with an ISDN telephone at the internal S0 bus.

If you hear the error tone when parking an external call an external call is already

After r0

you are reconnected with the external subscriber.

On ISDN terminals at the external multipoint connection at which a two-digit connection

ID must be entered for parking, enter 00 to

09, e.g. 01.

If you want to continue the call at an analog telephone in the telecommunications system, only enter the 2nd digit, e.g. 1.

The telecommunications system first attempts to park with one digit but then adds a "0" to the connection ID, e.g. 01.

If you hear the error tone when continuing, no external call is parked under the connection ID.


1 - 25

1


Room monitoring

You can use every analog telephone (system or standard telephone) in the telephone system to acoustically monitor the room in which it is located, for example to monitor a baby.

You ring up the guarding telephone from another internal or external telephone and listen into the room.

From an external location, you dial up the telephone system’s switching box by way of its direct dialling in or multiple subscriber number. After entering a code ("as-delivered" settings: no entry), you can post-dial the internal number of the guarding telephone and listen into the room. You must prepare room monitoring on the telephone that is intended for this purpose.

Preparing room monitoring ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS45 Q PT

Lift handset in the room to monitor

Initiate room monitoring


Place receiver next to the guarding telephone

Room monitoring from an internal telephone ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PZ P®

Lift handset Enter the guarding telephone’s internal phone number

Listen into the room

Room monitoring from an external telephone ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PZ Q Q PZ

Lift handset Enter the direct dialling in or multiple subscriber number of the switching box

Q PZ P®

Ringing tone

2 to 3 rings


Enter the code number for the switching box within 15 seconds as a

DTMF signal

Wait for s5 seconds internal music on hold if the code number is correct

Enter the internal number of the guarding telephone

Listen into the room

Cancelling room monitoring ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

ª

Replace handset in the monitored room

1 - 26


1

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You can also use a telephone in the hands free mode as the guarding telephone.

the guarding telephone, the room is already being monitored by another caller.

You cannot use an ISDN telephone on the internal S0 bus as a guarding telephone.

The internal phone number of the switching box must be entered as the only internal phone number in the call variants (ringing distribution settings) of one multiple subscriber number.

If you hear the busy tone after dialling up

Within 15 seconds you must enter the right code number as a DTMF signal with a DTMF hand-held transmitter or telephone as otherwise the telephone system will clear the connection.

When monitoring a room, please pay attention to the fact that you can also be heard in the monitored whenever you speak.

1 - 27

1


Relay switching

AS 190 plus, AS 191 plus: 4 relays (R1, R2,

R3, R4)

You can make diverse use of the potentialfree relay contacts instead of the door hands free unit. For example, you can use them to activate an additional bell or an additional door opener.

By programming, you define for each relay a internal phone number and whether it is to operate as a pulse relay (3 seconds on) or as an On / Off relay.

You can activate or deactivate the relays from any internal or external telephone.

From an external location, to do this you dial up the telephone system’s switching box via a direct dialling in or multiple subscriber number. After entry of a code ("as-delivered" settings: no entry), you can switch the relays by entering code digits.

To be noted when switching the relays:

If a port is programmed to connect an audio module, relay R4 is automatically assigned to the audio module.

If a door handsfree unit (FTZ 123 D12) is connected, the relays R3 and R4 are used for connecting the door handsfree unit and the door opener.

Relay on / off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS0Z PZ Q Pª

0 = off

Lift handset on / off Select the relay Internal phone number of the relay


Replace handset

Relay on / off from an external location ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PZ Q Q PZ

Lift handset Enter the direct dialling in or multiple subscriber number of the switching box

Q PS0Z

Ringing tone

2 to 3 ring


Enter the code number of the switching box within

15 seconds as a

DTMF signal

PZ Q Pª

0 = off

Wait for 5 seconds internal music on hold if the code number is correct

Select the relay Internal phone number of the relay on / off Acknowledgement tone

Replace handset

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

The internal phone number of the switching box must be entered as the only internal phone number in the call variants (ringing distribution setting) of one multiple subscriber number.

You must enter the right code number as a

DTMF signal with a DTMF hand-held transmitter or telephone within 15 seconds as otherwise the telephone system will clear the connection.

1 - 28


1

Inquiry / brokering

You can interrupt your telephone conversation and conduct an inquiry call with a second party in-between times.

The telephone system places your first call on hold. You then switch back to the first telephone call.

Internal inquiry / brokering ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

T Pr PZ PT Pr P

Conduct first call Inquiry

First call is on hold



Z

Enter "

0

" to switch to the external call or the internal number to switch to the internal call

PT P

Back to the first call Continue first call etc.

Inquiry call and first call are placed on hold

External inquiry / brokering ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

T Pr P0Z PT Pr P

Inquiry call and first call are on hold

Conduct first call Inquiry

First call is on hold


Z

Enter "

0

" to switch to the external call or the internal phone number to switch to the internal call

PT P

Back to first call Continue first call

Conduct inquiry call etc.

Inquiry in the room (muting) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You can interrupt your telephone call and speak with someone in the room in between times without your telephone partner being able to listen in. An external

T Pr subscriber on hold hears a tune if music on hold (MoH) is activated or is fed in from an external source.

Pr Pª

Internal or external call

Connection is placed on hold. You can talk without the telephone partner hearing.

Continue telephone call


1 - 29

1


Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

When making an external inquiry / line by pressing "

0

", even if automatic outside line seizure is set on the telephone.

An external subscriber on hold hears a tune if music on hold (MoH) is on or is fed in from an external source.

If you replace the receiver during an inquiry:

- You clear the current call,

- You receive a callback if a call is still on hold,

- You transfer an external call on hold to the internal user with whom you were in an inquiry.

Connection charges are incurred for the external call, even while the call is on hold.

1 - 30


1

Callback on busy

If your called external subscriber is busy, you can initiate an automatic callback from this external subscriber, provided he is an

ISDN subscriber or is a subscriber on a digital exchange.

Your telephone rings as soon as your desired call partner replaces the receiver. You receive a callback. The subscriber is called automatically when you pick up the receiver.

Initiating a callback ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PZQPrS22 Q Pª

Lift handset Call the external subscriber, busy tone, the subscriber is busy

Initiate callback Acknowledgement tone of the exchange

Replace handset

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

No callback from your desired call partner is possible if you hear the error tone:

- The subscriber is not an ISDN subscriber or is not connected to a digital exchange,

- The "callback on busy" feature is not available in the exchange.

If you should not be obtainable after initiating a callback, the callback will be cancelled and cleared after 20 seconds. If necessary, initiate the callback again.

A callback is cleared if the callback does not come into being or if it has not come into being within 45 minutes after initiation.

1 - 31

1


Tariff units factor

You can enter your own 4-digit tariff units factor (e.g. 0055 pfennigs per unit). In this way you determine how much one tariff unit costs for every subscriber to your telecommunications system.

With the 4-digit base factor you set your telecommunications system to the amount which the network operator charges for one tariff unit.

Defining your own tariff factor ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS186PZ Q Pª

Lift handset Define the tariff units factor

Enter tariff units factor

0000 ... 9999

(pfennigs)

Acknowledgment tone, enter the cost code if necessary

Replace handset

Entering the base factor for a tariff unit ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS187PZ Q Pª

Lift handset

Enter the base factor

(of the network operator)

Enter the base factor 0000 ...

9999 (pfennigs)


Replace handset

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Enter cost code?

If you hear the acknowledgment tone after the inputs, no cost code is programmed in the telecommunications system. It is not necessary to enter the cost code.

If you hear the error tone, the last input is incorrect. Start the entire input again from the beginning.

If you do not hear a tone after the inputs, a cost code is programmed in the telecommunications system.

Enter the cost code in four digits. If the code is correct you will hear the acknowledgment tone. If the code is incorrect, you will hear the error tone. Replace the handset and start the entire input again from the beginning with the correct cost code.

1 - 32


1

Phonebook - storing and dialling phone numbers

From your telephone or from a PC, you can centrally store up to 200 external phone numbers in the phonebook.

All users can dial the destinations in the phonebook, regardless of their external call privileges.

As well as normal phone numbers you can phonebook using the

S

and

R

keys. This means you can then use all the procedures on telephones which do not support the

S and

R

keys.

You can speed dial phonebook lines 190 to

198 by keying in digits 90 to 98.

Example: To identify another external phone number to your system in order to split the charges when you have seized an external

S00P

MSN

PR

Phonebook - dialling numbers ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Lift handset Enter the phonebook code

Enter the phonebook destination 0 0 0 to

1 9 9 ; the stored phone number is dialled.

Conduct the call

Speed dial variant - outside line seizure variant "0" ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Lift handset

Internal dial tone

Enter speed dial destination, e.g. 95. The number stored under index 195 in the phonebook is dialled.

Conduct the call

Speed dial variant - automatic outside line seizure variant ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Lift handset

External dial tone

Press the hash key

Internal dial tone

Enter speed dial destination, e.g. 95.

The number stored under index 195 in the phonebook is dialled.

Conduct the call

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You can post-dial further digits after selecting a phonebook destination.

blank phonebook destination.

You can redial the entire phone number with the redial function.

You hear the error tone after dialling a

If the telephone system’s barred range is programmed for your telephone, you cannot dial the phonebook numbers that are within the barred range. You hear the error tone.

1 - 33

1


Phonebook - storing a number ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª

Lift handset

Z

Enter the phonebook programming code

Enter a phonebook destination 00 to 199 by which you wish to store a phone number

PR Q Pª

Enter an external phone number without "0"

(outside line seizure) and without your own local

Conclude input


Replace handset code


S700

Q

ª

Phonebook - clearing a phone number ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª

Lift handset

Enter the code for clearing and entry

Q Pª

Enter the phonebook destination 000 to 199 that you wish to clear


Replace handset

Continue programming or end the programming mode by entering h

S700

Q

ª

1 - 34


1

Telephone lock - direct call (baby call)

You can protect your telephone against unauthorized use by locking it.

If your telephone is locked, you can:

- Only call internal users by pressing

R and the internal phone number

- Accept all incoming calls and, if necessary, switch them internally.

- Externally, you can only dial the stored direct phone number (baby number) and the stored autodial number. You must activate the autodial function before locking the telephone.

If you have programmed a telephone code for your telephone, you must enter your

4-digit code number to unlock it.

Locking a telephone ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS561 Q Pª

Lift handset Lock the telephone

Replace handset Acknowledgement tone

Unlocking a telephone ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS560 Q Pª

Lift handset Unlock telephone Acknowledgement tone, if necessary enter the telephone code

Replace handset

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Enter telephone code?

If you hear the acknowledgment tone after entering the code, no telephone code has been programmed for your telephone.

There is no need to enter the telephone code. If you hear the error tone, the last input was wrong. Begin the input again.

If you do not hear any tone after making inputs, a telephone code has been programmed for your telephone.

Enter the 4-digit telephone code. If the code is correct, you will hear the acknowledgement tone. If the code is wrong, you will hear the error tone. Replace the receiver and begin the complete input again with the right telephone code.

ISDN-Phones - Looking via

S

-procedure is not possible.

Programming a telephone code ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS661PZ PZQ Pª

Replace handset Program telephone code Enter old telephone code

Enter the new 4-digit telephone code

(0000 to 9999), acknowledgement tone

Replace handset

1 - 35

1


Clearing a telephone code ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS660PZ Q Pª

Lift handset Clear the telephone code Replace handset Enter the telephone code


Direct call (Baby call) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

The telephone is connected. After you pick up the receiver and press any key except the

S

and

R

keys, the stored direct phone number is dialled automatically. This is ideal for children who do not yet know how to dial a phone number.

Programming a direct number ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS7031PZ PRQPª

Lift handset Program direct phone number Enter the direct phone number without "0"

(external seizure) and your own local code

Conclude input,


Replace handset


S700

Q

ª

!

Clearing a direct phone number ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS7030 Q Pª

Lift handset Clear direct number AcknowledgeReplace handset ment tone


S700

Q

ª

1 - 36


1

Activating/deactivating timers

The telecommunications system provides 10 timers. You can use them to program the system to activate or deactivate functions at specific times and on specific days.

The following functions can be controlled by timer:

- Call variants (night service, day time

service)

- Internal call forwarding

- Busy on Busy

- External call privileges

- Telephone lock

- Second Call Busy

- Relays

- Diversions

You can assign a function to any timer.

The timers can only be programmed in the

"TK-Set" program.

You can activate or deactivate timer control from any telephone (such as for long weekends or holiday times). When a timer is switched off the "off" defaults of the functions are automatically active.

You can also switch the "on/off" defaults for the functions from any telephone (such as to set an earlier or later close of business).

You can combine several timers in a group and control them collectively.

Activating/deactivating timers ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS13PZ PZ QP ª

Lift handset Code for timer Timer group 0 = Timer off

1 = Timer on

2 = Funktion off

3 = Funktion and timer on


Replace handset

1 - 37

1


Diverting a door call to an external subscriber

AS 190 plus, AS 191 plus: If you wish to have a visitor reach you even when you are out of the house, you can divert door calls to an external phone number, e.g. to a radio telephone. Despite door call diversion, the internal telephone still rings. The door call can still be accepted internally.

When you divert to an ISDN terminal that is capable of displaying a caller’s phone number, you can determine whether or not the call consists of a door call.

From an external location, you switch door call diversion via the telephone system’s switching box.

Door call diversion on ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS581PZ

1 = external phone

number

3 = phonebook number

PZ P

Lift handset Door call diversion qn

Diversion destination

Enter the internal phone number of the door

Z PR

Conclude input Enter the external phone number or phonebook number

Q Pª


Replace handset

Door call diversion off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS580PZ Q Pª

Lift handset Door call diversion off Enter the internal phone number of the door


Replace handset

Door call diversion on / off from an external location ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PZ Q Q PZ

Lift handset Enter the direct dialling Ringing tone Wait for 5 seconds

2 to 3 rings

Enter the code number of the switching box in number or multiple subscriber number of the internal music on hold within 15 seconds as a switching box DTMF signal

Q PS581PZ

1 = external phone

number


PZ P

Door call diversion on Diversion destination

Enter the internal phone number of the door


Z PR Q Pª

Enter the external phone number or phonebook number

Conclude input Acknowledgement tone

Replace handset

1 - 38


1

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You hear the error tone if no external phone number is programmed for door call diversion.

The external door call will be disconnected after 10 minutes.

Door call diversion is only possible if at least one outside line is free.

You bear the connection costs of door call diversion.

Ringing to the external subscriber is cancelled after 30 seconds.

You cannot actuate the electrical door opener.

1 - 39

1


Switching over the door call variant

AS 190 plus, AS 191 plus - In door call variant 1 (day time service) and door call variant 2 (night service), it is determined which internal subscribers are called simultaneously when the bell push is pressed.

You can activate or deactivate door call variant 2 (night service) at any time, from any internal or external telephone. From an external telephone, to do this you must dial up the switching box of your telephone system.

When door call variant 2 is deactivated, door call variant 1 (day time service) is on.

Door call variant 2 (night service) on / off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

QPª

Lift handset Switch door call variant 2 on / off Enter the internal phone number of the door


Replace handset

Door call variant 2 ( night service) from an external source on / off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PZ Q Q PZ

Lift handsetr Enter the direct dialling in or multiple subscriber number of the switching box

Ringing tone

2 to 3 rings



DTMF signal

QPª


Switch door call variant 2 on / off Enter the internal phone number of the door


Replace handset

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

If the selection "ext. all" is set up when call variant 2 is switched on/off, door call variant

2 is switched on/off at the same time.

1 - 40


1

Actuating a door intercom system and a door opener

AS 190 plus, AS 191 plus - If you have connected a door hands free unit to your telephone system, you can talk to a visitor standing at your door.

Your telephone rings with a door call when the visitor presses the bell button. After the last ring, you still have 30 seconds time to accept the door call by picking up the receiver. During this time, your telephone is busy for all other calls.

If another telephone rings with the door call, you can fetch the door call to your telephone.

In an inquiry or even when not making a call, you can actuate the electrical door opener directly from your telephone.

Accepting a door call ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A Ph PT

Lift the receiver

Door call at your telephone

Conduct door conversation

Calling the door station / picking up a door call ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS11 PT

Lift handset Call the door station Conduct the door conversation

Actuating the door opener during a door conversation ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

T Pr PS11 Q PT

You are conducting a door conversation

Inquiry Actuate the door opener; it is on for 3 seconds


Continue door conversation

Actuating the door opener directly ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS12 Q Pª

Lift handset Actuate the door opener; it is on for 3 seconds


Replace handset

Actuating the door opener during an external conversation ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

T PrPS12 Q Pr PT

You are conducting an external conversation

Inquiry Actuate the door opener; it is on for 3 seconds


Return to external conversation

Continue external conversation

1 - 41

1


Communicating a caller’s phone number on the internal

S0 bus

AS 141 plus, AS 191 plus - When an external ISDN subscriber calls, the telephone system communicates the caller’s phone number to the called ISDN terminal (ISDN telephone or PC featuring an ISDN card) on the internal S0 bus.

On the ISDN terminal, you can specify that the telephone system adds a "0" for seizing an outside line before the communicated phone number. If you have stored a phone number in this way, you can dial it automatically from the call list of an ISDN telephone or an ISDN PC.

Outside line seizure - "0" on / off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS62PZ

1 = on

0 = off

Q Pª

Lift handset "0" to seize an outside line

On / off


Replace handset

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

This setting is only recommended if you have set "outside line seizure 0" on the

ISDN terminal.

This setting is not necessary if you have set

"automatic outside line seizure" or "direct outside line seizure" on the ISDN terminal.

1 - 42


1

Communicating your phone number

The telephone communicates your phone number to an external ISDN subscriber before the connection is established ("as-delivered" settings).

In Euro ISDN, two phone number communication variants are at your disposal:

Communicating the called party’s phone number to the caller.

Your phone number is communicated to the external ISDN subscriber who calls you.

Communicating the caller’s phone number to the called party

Your phone number is communicated to the external ISDN subscriber that you call.

Enter this feature as an additional feature on the phone with which you apply for your

ISDN connection. If you wish to be able to activate / deactivate communication of phone numbers in individual cases, you must order this separately.

Communicating your phone number to the caller on / off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS67PZ

1 = on

Q Pª

0 = off

Lift handset Communication to the caller

On / off Acknowledgement tone

Replace handset

Communicating your phone number to the called party on / off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS68PZ

1 = on

0 = off

Q Pª

Lift handset Communication to the called party

On / off Acknowledgement tone

Replace handset

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Which phone number is communicated to the other end?

On a point-to-point connection, your local code, your system phone number and your direct dialling in number are communicated (e.g. 030 987654 12).

On a point-to-multipoint connection , your local code and your multiple subscriber number (e.g. 030 87654323) that has been assigned to you by programming are communicated.

When dialling externally, you may define wich MSN is transfered, in order to seperate the call charges. To seize the outside line,

S00

- MSN-

R

- external phone number.

1 - 43

1


Follow me - diverting calls from other telephones

You can divert all calls from other telephones which may not be manned individually to your telephone.

You can use the diverted telephone for phoning as usual.

When you pick up the receiver on your telephone, the special dial tone reminds you that the follow me feature is on.

Follow me - on ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS571PZ Q Pª

Replace handset

Lift handset Follow me - on Enter the number of the phone from where you wish to divert calls


Follow me - off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

hQPS570 Q Pª

Follow me - off Replace handset Lift handset

Special dial tone


Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Calls can only be diverted once.

Calls back are not diverted.

You can no longer divert your extension if a diversion to your telephone has already been set up.

"Follow me" from a telephone that is set to do not disturb to your own telephone is not possible. You hear the error tone.

Users of radio cells (base station with cordless telephones) cannot activate diversion.

1 - 44


1

Diversion to - diverting calls to another telephone

Diversions through the telephone system

You can divert all calls for your telephone to another telephone in the telephone system or to an external subscriber. In doing so, you can define whether only calls to the first internal number or calls to the second internal phone number are to be diverted. If calls to both internal phone numbers are to be diverted, you must activate diversion separately for each internal phone number. You can also select the diversion to variant additionally:

Permanently – Calls are diverted immediately

When busy – Calls are diverted when the internal phone number is busy.

When there is no answer – Calls are diverted after 15 seconds if no-one answers.

Despite diversion, you can continue to make telephone calls in the usual fashion. When you pick up the receiver, the special dial tone reminds you that diversion is on.

From an external location, you switch diversions by dialling up the telephone system’s switching box. After entering the code, you set diversions with the same procedures and the same codes as from an internal location.

Diversion to - on ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS58PZ

1 = permanent

2 = on busy

3 = if no answer

PZ

1 = external destination

2 = internal destination

3 = abbreviated dialling destination

Lift handset Diversion to - on Enter the variant of diversion destination

Enter the type of diversion destination

PZ PZ PR Q Pª

Enter the internal phone number that is to diverted

Enter the phone number or abbreviated dialling destination

Conclude input


Replace handset

Diversion to - off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

hQPS580PZ Q Pª

Lift handset

Special dial tone

Diversion to - off Enter the internal phone whose diversion is to be deactivated


Replace handset

1 - 45

1


Configuring diversion to from an external location

(example: diversion to - on) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PZ Q Q PZ

Lift handset Enter the direct dialling in or multiple sub-

Ringing tone Wait for 5 seconds internal music on

2 to 3 rings scriber number of the switching box

Q PS58PZ

1 = permanent

2 = on busy

3 = if no answer hold

PZ


DTMF signal

1 = external destination

2 = internal destination

3 = abbreviated dialling destination

Diversion to - on Wait for 5 seconds internal music on hold if the code

PZ PZ

Enter the variant of diversion destination

Enter the type of diversion destination

PR Q Pª

Enter the internal phone that is to be diverted

Enter the phone number or abbreviated dialling destination

Conclude input


Replace handset

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You can only configure one diversion to another telephone. When you activate a diversion, you clear any existing diversion and you replace it by the new one.

Your telephone can be the diversion destination of all other internal users.

Diversions to a telephone that is set to do not disturb are not possible.

When activating a diversion, you hear the error tone if you have selected a blank abbreviated dialling destination.

Diverted external calls can also be accepted at telephones that are otherwise only allowed for internal communications.

Diversion to an external subscriber

For diversion to an external subscriber,

- an outside line must be free

- the diverting user must be privileged to dial the external phone number.

Calls can only be diverted once. Calls diverted to you are signalled on your telephone, even if you have activated a diversion on your telephone.

You pay the call charges for a diversion to an external destination.

Calls back are not diverted.

1 - 46


1

Diversions by the ISDN exchange

You can only use the "call forwarding" feature after specially ordering this feature from your network carrier. The ISDN exchange then forwards all calls to your system or your multiple subscriber number to another destination that you have specified.

Calls can be forwarded without restriction to any connection in the world, even to radio telephones.

You can activate or deactivate the call forwarding variants from any telephone in the telephone system:

Permanent call forwarding

- all calls are forwarded immediately.

Call forwarding on busy

- all calls are forwarded immediately if the system or multiple subscriber number is busy.

Call forwarding if no answer

- all calls are forwarded after 15 seconds if nobody answers.

From an external location, you switch the call forwarding settings by dialling up the telephone system’s switching box. After entering the appropriate code, you configure call forwarding with the same procedures and the same codes as from an internal location.

Permanent call forwarding on ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS63PZ

1 = external phone

number


PZ P

Lift handset Diversion destination Enter the code for permanent call forwarding

Diversion: Enter the system or multiple subscriber number

R PZ PR Q Pª

Conclude input Destination:Enter the external phone number or phonebook number

Conclude input Wait for the acknowledgement tone

Replace handset

Call forwarding on busy on ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS64PZ

1 = external phone

number


PZ P

Lift handset

Enter the call forwarding on busy code

Diversion destination Diversion: Enter the system or multiple subscriber number

R PZ

Conclude input

PR

Destination:Enter the external phone number or phonebook number

Conclude input

Q Pª

Wait for the acknowledgement tone

Replace handset

1 - 47

1


Call forwarding if no answer on ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS65PZ

1 = external phone

number


PZ P

Lift handset Enter the call forwarding if no answer on code

Diversion destination Diversion: Enter the system or multiple subscriber number

R PZ PR Q Pª



Replace handset

Call forwarding off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS630PZ PR QPª

Lift handset Enter the call forwarding off code

Enter the system or multiple subscriber number

Conclude input and wait for the acknowledgement tone

Replace handset

Configuring call forwarding from an external location

(example: permanent call forwarding) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PZ Q Q PZ

Lift handset Enter the direct dialling in or multiple subscriber number of the switching

Ringing tone

2 to 3 rings

Wait for 5 seconds internal music on hold box

Q PS63PZ

1 = external phone

number


PZ


DTMF signal

P

Diversion destination Wait for 5 seconds internal music on hold if the code number is correct

Enter the code for permanent call forwarding

R PZ PR

Diversion: Enter the system or multiple subscriber number

Q Pª



Replace handset

1 - 48


1

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

When call forwarding is on, you hear the special dial tone of the ISDN exchange when you seize the outside line.

the acknowledgement tone. Do not replace the receiver during this time.

When you have configured call forwarding in the exchange, please note that up to a minute may pass between setting up and

Call forwarding from an external location: please note that you can conclude inputs by pressing the r

key instead of the

R

key.

1 - 49

1


Connection data set - Setting and printing the printout

You can have the connection data sets for all subscribers or for individual subscribers printed via the connected serial printer.

A connection data set is created and printed at the end of every connection.

The telecommunications system saves 500 connection data sets, even in the event of a power failure.

The connection data set contains the following information:

- Subscriber who has set up the connection

- Sent multiple subscriber number (MSN)

- Total costs

- Date and time of the connection

- Duration of the connection

- Dialed phone number (depending on the setting, without phone number, with complete phone number or with short phone number without the last three digits)

Setting the printout of the connection data sets ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS182PZ

0 = without phone no.

1 = complete phone no.

Q Pª

2 = short phone no.

Lift handset

Define printout for selected phone number

Enter the digit


Replace handset

Printing the connection data set for all subscribers ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS188PZ

1 = switch on

Q Pª

0 = switch off

Lift handset

Print the connection data set for all subscribers

Enter the digit


Replace handset

Printing the connection data set for individual subscribers ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS189PZPZ

1 = switch on

QPª

0 = switch off

Lift handset Print the connection data set for individual subscribers


Enter digit, acknowledgment tone, enter the cost code if necessary

Replace handset

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Enter cost code?





1 - 50


1

Example of a printout of the connection data sets (80 characters/line) ¢¢¢¢¢

Tln 11|04.09.98,11:52|Ziel 0190570122|Einh. 5|Betrag 0,60 DM

Example of a printout of the connection data sets (24 characters/line) ¢¢¢¢¢

Teilnehmer 11 Msn 1

Datum 04.09.98 Uhr 12:52

Ziel 9876543

TE 01 Betrag 00,12 DM

Teilnehmer 12 Msn 2

Datum 04.09.98 Uhr 15:52

Ziel 5678905

TE 03 Betrag 00,36 DM

Explanation:

Tln 11

- Internal subscriber who has set up the external connection

Msn 1

- Sent multiple subscriber number / dialed MSN for incoming connection

Datum 04.09.98

Uhr 12:52

- Time the connection starts

TE 03 / Einh.5

- Tariff units

Betrag 0,60 DM

- Costs for the connection

Ziel 567890

- Dialed external phone number / phone number of the caller for

incoming connection

1 - 51

1


Displaying connection costs on an analog telephone

On an analog telephone, you can display connection costs if the telephone has a units counter. To display connection costs, you must activate communication of the charge pulses for your telephone on your telephone.

If you have requested the "communication of connection charges during and at the end of the connection" feature from your network carrier, your telephone continuously displays the costs during a connection.

You can display the costs of your last connection that are stored in the telephone system at any time. To do this, it suffices if you have requested the "communication of connection charges at the end of the connection" feature from your network carrier.

Communication of charge pulses on / off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS52PZ

1 = on

Q Pª

0 = off

Lift handset Enter the digit Communication of charge pulses


Replace handset

Displaying the costs of the last connection ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS44 Q Pª

Lift handset Replace handset Display costs of the last connection

Acknowledgement tone; wait until the display appears

Note ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

connection by entering

S44

, please note that your telephone’s totalizer may total up the costs of the last connection.

For technical reasons, the data on the network carrier’s invoice may deviate from the total connection costs displayed by the telephone system. The charge units counter in the network carrier’s exchange is always binding.

1 - 52

Connection costs - Defining a limit


1

You can enter and define a 7-digit costs limit (pfennigs), to which telephone it is to apply or clear the costs limit.

You can also define what is to happen when the cost limit is reached.

Can the subscriber finish the started conversation but not start a new one or is the connection cleared? Another external call is not possible until after the connection costs of this subscriber have been cleared.

Exceptions: The subscriber can dial the direct phone number even after reaching the cost limit.

Entering cost limit ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS183PZPZQ Pª

Replace handset

Lift handset Define cost limit Enter internal phone number

Enter cost limit 7 digits,

0... 9999999 pfennigs, acknowledgment tone, enter the cost code if necessary

Cleardown at cost limit ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS184PZ Q Pª

Lift handset Replace handset Define cleardown at cost limit

Enter digit,

1 = clear connection

0 = do not clear


Clear cost limit ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS185PZ Q Pª

Lift handset Clear cost limit Enter internal phone number


Replace handset

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Enter cost code?





1 - 53

1


Connection costs - Print and delete totals

The telecommunications system saves the total connection costs for

- every internal subscriber

- every external phone number (MSN)

- and the whole telecommunications system (S0 access)

Providing you have registered the billable feature "Transmission of connection charges at the end of the connection" with the network operator.

You can print out the total connection costs and clear them at any time if necessary.

Printing and deleting connection costs for a subscriber ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS15PZ

1 = print

0 = delete

PZ QPª

Lift handset Connection costs for a subscriber

Print or delete Enter internal phone number, Acknowledgment tone, enter the cost code if necessary

Replace handset

Printing and deleting connection costs for a external phone number ¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS17PZ

1 = print

0 = delete

PZ PR

Lift handset Print or delete Connection costs for an external phone number


Terminate MSN input

Q Pª


Replace handset

Printing and deleting connection costs for the telecommunications system

h PS18PZ

1 = print

0 = delete

Q Pª

Lift handset

Connection costs for the telecommunications system

Print or delete Acknowledgment tone, enter the cost code if necessary

Replace handset

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

The costs for door call diversions from an external source are recorded under the internal call number of the door (T xx).

1 - 54


1

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Enter cost code?




the error tone. Replace the handset and start the entire input again from the beginning with the correct cost code.

For technical reasons, the information on the network operator’s bill may differ from the total connection costs of the telecommunications system. The tariff units counter in the network operator’s exchange is always binding.

Enter the cost code in four digits. If the code is correct you will hear the acknowledgment tone. If the code is incorrect, you will hear

The telecommunications system saves the total connection costs even in the event of a power failure.

Example of a printout of the connection costs ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Tln 11 Einheiten 2345 Betrag 281,40 DM



IND 1 Einheiten 2357 Betrag 282,84 DM

IND 2 Einheiten 421 Betrag 50,52 DM

S0-1 Einheiten 2778 Betrag 333,36 DM

Legend:

Tln 11

- Total connection costs for internal subscriber 11, related to own tariff

Einheiten 2345

- Tariff units

Betrag 281,40 DM

- Costs for the connection

IND 1

S0-1

- Total connection costs counted under the sent external phone number 1, related to own tariff

- Total connection costs for the S0 connection 1 (for the whole telecommunications system, related to the network operator’s tariff

1 - 55

1


1 - 56

Operation - System Telephones

2

System telephones ST 25

loudspeaker function keys

AGFEO

0306179300 set esc next enter clear

Konferenz

HdR

Bank

J. Fliege

Umleitung zu

Versicherung

Makeln 2

IHK

7

STU

0

. / _

4

JKL

8

VWX

1

ABC

5

MNO

2

DEF

6

PQR

9

YZ-

3

GHI

Intern

Anwalt ara

E. Paschke

Gebühren

R display

1

...

0

*

,

#

!

(

&

$

?

Y t red LED microphone green LED

Dialling key pad - For dialling a number and entering data

# and * keys

Set key - for initiating and ending programming esc key - for clearing a connection or for cancelling programming mode next key - for scrolling further in the display in the event of different functions enter key - for confirming inputs clear key - for clearing a display or data shift key - to use the second level of function keys and to switch the phonebook register mode (numeric / alphabetical)

Telephone directory key - to call up the telephone directory r

:

=

%

¶

¶

Inquiry key - for inquiries and brokering

Redial key - for dialling the number dialled last

Loudspeaker key - for activating the loudspeaker and switching to hands free mode.

You can alter the function by programming.

10 function key - in the "asdelivered settings", these keys have default assingnments. You can change their functions by programmimg.

Red LED - Flashes in the event of an appointment call and an entry in the call list; lights up when do not disturb is no.

Green LED - Flashes when hands free mode is on, lights up by operating a headset.

2 - 1

2


Setting up and cleaning the system telephones, inserting the marking strips

Location ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Place the system telephones in a suitable location. Pay attention to the following points:

- Do not install them where they may be splashed by water or chemicals.

- Plastic feet of the telephones:

Your unit was produced for normal conditions of use. The plastic feet of the telephone may be detrimentally influenced by chemicals that are used to produce furniture or which are used in the production of care agents. In certain circumstances, the feet of the telephones altered by external influences may leave nasty traces. Understandably, we cannot assume any liability for such damage.

Therefore, use a slip-proof support surface for your telephones, particularly on new furniture or on furniture that has been treated with care agents.

Cleaning ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You can clean your telephone easily. Pay attention to the following points:

- Wipe the telephone with a slightly moist cloth or use an anti-static cloth.

- Never use a dry cloth (charges may produce defects in the electronic circuitries)

- In any case, make sure that moisture does not penetrate into the interior (switches and contacts may be damaged).

Inserting the marking strips of the function keys ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Place your finger nail betwenn the window and the telephone housing at the top. Pull down the window so that it bends outwards.

Now you can remove it.

Insert the labelling strip. You can print the appropriate labels on your PC with the configuration program TK-Set.

To insert, place the window in the slit at the bottom. Press down to bend out and insert the other end.

2 - 2


2

System telephone display

Characters and pictograms on the display ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

xi ≈∑"11!52

13 15 -- -- 23 e.g. "read out call list", "do not disturb", "diversion", "reminder call". You can display the activated function(s) by pressing the "next" key.

x i

X

I

1st Display line

External S0-port. One outside line

(one B-channel) is busy. The x flashes as long as an external party is calling.

Internal S0-port (AS 141 plus, AS

191 plus). One line (one B-channel) is busy.

External S0-port. Both outside lines

(both B-channels) are busy.

Internal S0-port (AS 141 plus, AS

191 plus). Both lines (both Bchannels) are busy.

During an external call, after every charge pulse the current call charges for up to 5 seconds are displayed in the first display line, e.g. "

0,36 DM

". Prerequisite: communication of connection charges during / at the end of the connection" has been ordered from the network carrier and the cost display is on. After an external call, the costs of the last call are displayed for 20 seconds if connection charges are only sent at the end of a connection and the cost display is on. The time is then displayed.

-

≈

Both B-channels from the S0-port

(internal or external) are free.

Call variant 2 (night service) on

(moon symbol)

13

2nd Display line

Date, e.g. "

1 March 1997

" or, if you have configured the status display (set 29), the internal numbers of the up to five selected users who are busy are displayed, e.g. 13, 15 and 23.

∑

!

Wake up on

"

11:52

Appointment on

Time or, when you pick up the receiver, you see a display of your system telephone’s internal phone numbers, e.g. "

12/20

" (12 = 1st internal phone number, 20 = 2nd internal phone number) or

"

12/--

" (_ _ = no second internal phone number defined).

--

Important: functions have been activated on your system telephone,

The internal user selected for the internal status is free.

If you have not selected a subscriber for the internal status, the 2 nd

digits of the internal phone numbers of the subscribers (max.

16) that are busy appear here.

Example:

123-5--8---23---

Subscribers 11, 12, 13, 15, 18, 22 and 23 are busy.

2 - 3

2


System telephone settings

You can define the following settings on your system telephone:

- Tone ringing volume and tone

- Open listening / hands free volume

- Display contrast to adapt it optimally to the angle from which you are viewing the telephone

- Hands free microphone (automatic activation). It switches on automatically when you receive a single voice message.

- Headset volume (ST 25)

- Telephone code for barring your telephone

- Display of call charges in the first display line.

- Status display (internal user busy / free / not connected) or date in the second display line

- Language of display messages (English /

German)

- Set call list

- Set outside line seizure - direct external dialling or external dialling with "0"

The ISDN network sets the date and time.

Setting the tone ringing volume ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!21

Enter "set 21" to set the tone ringing volume.

Tone ringing vol

1 2 3>4<5 6 7

"

Enter the digit for the new setting, e.g. "2"

Meanings:

1 - very low

7 - very high.

You hear a brief sample tone.

Tone ringing vol

1>2<3 4 5 6 7

!

Conclude programming.

In future, your telephone will ring at the newly set volume.

Setting the tone ringing tone ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!22

Enter "set 22" to set the tone of tone ringing.

The current setting is marked.

Tone ring. tone

1 2 3>4<5 6 7

"


Meanings:

1 - very slow

7 - very fast.

You hear a brief sample tone.

Tone ring. tone

1>2<3 4 5 6 7

!


In future, your telephone rings with the newly set tone.

2 - 4


2

Setting the display ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!23

Enter "set 23" to modify the display contrast.

The current setting is marked

Display contrast

1 2 3>4<5 6 7

"


Meanings:

1 - more viewed from the front is good

7 - more viewed from above is good.

The contrast changes immediately.

Display contrast

1>2<3 4 5 6 7

!


Hands free microphone automatically on ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!24

Enter "set 24" to automatically activate the hands free microphone.


auto. Microphone on: 1 off:>0<

"

Press the digit 1 to activate automatic activation of the hands free microphone

(deactivate by pressing the key "0").

auto. Microphone on:>1< off: 0

!


Setting the open listening volume ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!25

Enter "set 25" to set the open listening volume. The current setting is marked.

Open list.vol.

1 2 3 4>5<6 7

"


Meaning: 1 - very low

7 - very high.

Open list.vol.

1>2<3 4 5 6 7

!


Setting the headset volume (ST 25) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!26

Enter "set 26" to set the headset volume.


Headset volume

1 2 3 4>5<

"


Meaning: 1 - very low

5 - very high.

Headset volume

1>2<3 4 5

!


2 - 5

2


Telephone code ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Every system telephone can be locked with the telephone lock (see "Telephone lock emergency / direct call").

Then, no external calls are possible except for the stored emergency phone numbers

*

,

#

, the direct phone number (baby call)

!27

and the "auto dial" number. Normally, anyone can unlock the telephone lock. You can prevent unlocking by specifying a code.

Then, the telephone can only be unlocked by entering the 4-digit code.

Enter "set 27" to set the telephone code.

Telephone code

----

?

"

If necessary, clear any existing code.

Enter the 4-digit telephone code, e.g. 2345

Telephone code

2345

!


Cost display ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!28

Enter "set 28" to set "display of call charges". The current setting is marked. The cost display is off. The time is displayed instead of the costs of an ongoing external call.

Cost display on: 1 off:>0<

"

Cost display on:>1< off: 0

!

"1" cost display on Example: "1" - on

"0": cost display off

Prerequisite: you have requested "communication of connection charges during / at the end of a connection" from the network carrier.

During an external call, after every charge pulse the current call charges are displayed for up to 5 seconds in the first display line.

Otherwise, the external phone number is displayed. By pressing the "Units" key , you can display the current call charges for 5 seconds at any time.

At the end of a connection, the costs of the last call are displayed for 20 seconds. The time then appears.


2 - 6


2

Status display / date ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!29

Enter "set 29" to set "display of the internal status of internal users or the date".

The current setting is marked. The status display is off. In the second display line, the date is displayed instead of the internal status of the internal users (user is free or busy).

Status display on: 1 off:>0

"

"1": Status display on Example: "1" - on

"0": Status display off

Status display on:>1< off: 0

!

$

Status display variant 1

Press the "set" key. Now, the status is displayed instead of the date in the second display line.

The second digits of the busy users internal telephone numbers (up to 16 users) are shown here.

Example: Internal user 11, 12, 13, 15, 18, 22 and 23 are busy.

Status display variant 2

Press the "enter" key. Define five internal users whose status is important to you.

-- 11:52

---------------x- 11:52

123-5--8---23---

Internal status

-- -- -- -- --

"

Successively enter the first internal phone numbers (primary internal phone numbers) of the users.


Internal status

13 15 16 17 23

!

Example of a status display

Internal user 13 is busy (external connection, one outside line (B channel) busy) and internal users 15, 16, 17 and 23 are free.

When your system telephone is idle, you can temporarily switch between the status display and the date by pressing the "next" key . The programmed display is activated again after you press any key on the system telephone.

x- 11:52

13 -- -- -- --

Date / time ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You do not need to enter the date and time.

The display of the date and time is controlled by the ISDN network.

When the telephone system is installed, the date and time are set automatically after the first chargeable external connection and are then managed by the telephone system.

Any necessary corrections and the summer/ winter time changeover are controlled by the ISDN exchange whenever you make an external call.

2 - 7

2


Language changeover ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!20

Enter "set 20" to set the required language in the display.

Language

German

&

Select the required language by pressing

"next".

Language

English

!


Call list on / off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

If you do not accept an external ISDN subscriber’s call, the caller’s communicated phone number, the time and the date are automatically entered in your system telephone’s call list.

Internal users can enter themselves by means of the "entry in the call list" procedure.

You can dial the phone numbers from the call list or you can clear an entry (see "call list").

Define

- Whether a call list is to be created for all calls, i.e. calls with a phone number and calls with a name (callers whose names are in the telephone system’s telephone directory).

- Whether a call list is only to be created for calls with names or

- Whether no call list is to be created for external calls. A call list is always created for internal calls.

!2*

List of calls a:>0<e: 1 nN: 2

"

!

Enter "set 2

* " to set the call list. The current setting is marked

Enter a digit, e.g. "1"

0 = call list off for external calls

1 = call list on. All calls are entered. This includes calls with phone numbers and calls with names (callers whose names are in the telephone system’s telephone directory

2 = only calls with names are entered in the call list

Conclude programming

Example of an entry in the call list

- with phone number

List of calls a: 0 e:>1<nN: 2

052198765432 from 11:52 15.5.

- with name

MAIER from 13:11 15.5.

2 - 8


2

Setting outside line seizure ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Depending of your area of use, you can choose between two outside line seizure settings (seizure of an outside line / B channel) for your system telephone.

Automatic outside line seizure variant

(direct access)

You hear the external dial tone (continuous tone) when you lift the receiver or when you press the loudspeaker key.

You reach an external subscriber simply by dialling the corresponding phone number.

The telephone system automatically seizes an outside line (B channel).

To reach an internal user of your telephone system, you must first press the internal key and then post-dial the internal phone number.

"0" outside line seizure variant

("as-delivered" settings)

You hear the internal dial tone (three short tones that are repeated constantly) when you lift the receiver or press the loudspeaker key.

You reach an external subscriber by dialling a code "0" and the corresponding phone number.

To reach an internal user of your telephone system, you only need to dial the internal phone number.

With this variant, the system telephones behave like analog standard and ISDN telephones.

!2#

"

!

Enter "set to

#

" to set outside line seizure.


Enter a digit, e.g. "1"

1 = direct access (automatic outside line seizur) on

0 = direct access (automatic outside line seizure) off, "0" outside line seizure in then on


Direct access on: 1 off:>0<

Direct access on:>1< off: 0

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

The outside line seizure variants can only be set on the digital ISDN system telephones ST

25 of the AS 141 plus and AS 191 plus with the procedures of the analog and ISDN terminals.

2 - 9

2


Function keys - freely programmable functions (overview)

Reject


Do not disturb

Units

Reject current call. Caller hear busy tone.

Deactivate Call Waiting tone. Caller hear busy tone.

Special function keys that can be configured:

- call waiting prevention for call to the first internal phone number

- call waiting prevention for call to the second internal phone number

- call waiting prevention for call to the 1 st

and 2 st internal phone number

To turn off tone ringing (do not disturb)


- Do not disturb for calls to the first internal phone number

- Do not disturb for calls to the second internal phone number

- Do not disturb for calls to the first and second internal phone numbers

- Do not disturb for internal calls

- Do not disturb for external calls

- Do not disturb for internal and external calls

Call variant 2

Call variant 3

To turn call variant 2 (night service) on or off


- Single switching of call variant 2 for each external phone number of

the telephone system

- Joint switching of call variant 2 for all external phone numbers of the

telephone system.

Call variant 3 (call forwarding) on or off


- Single switching of call variant 3 for each external phone number of

the telephone system

- Joint switching of call variant 3 for all external phone numbers of the

telephone system.

Announcement

Announcement via an audio module or a loudspeaker system

Busy on Busy

Caller hears busy tone if an extension is busy when a call is distributed.

Special function keys programmable:

- Activate Busy on Busy for every call distribution individually

- Activate Busy on Busy for all call distributions globally

Call by Call clr (clear)*

Voice message

To select a network provider, take over from the LCR

To clear a setting

Voice message to system telephones

Special function key that can be configured:

- Voice message to defined internal users

Display of call charges

Malicious call tracing

Identification of malicious callers by the ISDN exchange

Remote scanning

Postdial a stored DTMF tone sequence (

1

...

0

,

*

,

#

), e.g. to remotely scan an answering machine.

Pick up

Headset

Incognito

To pick up external calls. Special function key that can be configured:

- Picking up internal calls and external calls of defined internal users.

For operating a headset (only on the digital system telephone)

Conceal your own phone number from the called party

2 - 10


2

Internal key

To dial internal users. Special function key that can be configured:

- Internal call to a defined internal user

To turn ISDN call forwarding on or off

ISDN call forwarding

ISDN hold

To place an external call on hold in the exchange (only possible on a point-to-multipoint connection)

Conference

To initiate a conference with internal users or external subscribers

Open listening

Change loudspeaker volume for open listening.

volume

LCR

Brokering

Activate or deactivate LCR (Least Cost Routing) for your system telephone.

For brokering between several external connections

Memory

Store an external phone number from the display.

MSN / External

To seize a specific S0 basic access per phone number and, in the case of

key

point-to-multipoint connections, to communicate a specific multiple subscriber number (MSN), e.g. for charge clearing in the event of external dialling. Special function key that can be configured:- MSN / external key with a defined external phone number

Reserve

Relay

To reserve an outside line (B channel) when all lines are busy

AS 191 plus - To switch the relays

Inquiry*

To initiate inquiry, connecting, brokering.

Telephone lock

To lock the system telephone and to activate emergency / direct call

Phonebook*

Appointment

Timer

Door

To dial a phone number from the phonebook

To turn an entered appointment on or off

Activate or deactivate a timer (timer control of the telecommunications system, such as call variants, diversions, relays)

Special function keys programmable: Timers 1 ... 9, 0

AS 191 plus - To establish a connection to the door hands free unit

Door opener

Transfer

AS 191 plus - Switch on electric door opener for 3 seconds

To transfer an external call to an external user

Diversion from

To divert all calls from another telephone to the current telephone

Diversion to

To divert all calls to another internal user or external subscriber

Wake up

Forward to

To turn the entered wake up time on or off

Forward an incoming call to another phone number without answering the call.

To dial a stored phone number

Destination memory

- public

- private

- The phone number is stored in your telephone and in the phone book.

- The phone number is only stored in your telephone.

Notes : The functions marked

*

are already available as fixed function keys on the system telephone.

2 - 11

2


Function key assignments

When the telephone system is delivered, the assignments of the freely programmable function keys (F keys) are initially fixed and are identical on all system telephones. You can individually adapt the function key assignments to your specific needs. You yourself can define which function is to apply to which key.

You can apply a function to each of the 10 function keys, which you then only need to initiate by pressing the corresponding function key.

Each function key additionally has a second level. You initiate the functions of the second level by pressing the "shift" key and by then pressing the corresponding function key.

Function key assignments - "as-delivered" settings ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Brokering

Destination public

Night

Destination public

Pick up

Destination public

Conference

Destination public

Diversion to

Destination public

Units

Destination public

Do not disturb

Destination public

Voice Message

Destination public

Appointment

Destination public

Internal

Destination public

Changing function key assignments ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!31

"set 31": initiates programming.

Press FP key

Key esc

%

Diversion to enter next esc

" or

Y&

$

!

&

Press the function key whose function you wish to modify (if necessary, press the "shift" key beforehand for the second level)

The current function is displayed.

Enter first letter of the function´s name, e.g.

„D“ for destination key, or, by pressing the

"next" key, scroll down until the desired function is displayed or

By pressing the "shift" and the "next" keys, scroll up until the desired function is displayed, e.g. "wake up".

"enter": confirm selection and modify a different function key or

"set": end programming. The function of the function key has been reassigned.

Destination key enter next esc

Wake up enter next esc

Press FP key

Key esc

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

2 - 12


2

Key assignments with special functions (examples) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

As described in "Modifying function key assignments", initiate programming by entering " set 31" and select the function key and the function.

"Do not disturb" function key

$

"enter": confirm selection of the function.

Do not disturb enter next esc

Do not disturb prim: 1 sec: 2

"

$

"

!

Enter the phone number to which do not disturb is to apply:

1 = 1. internal phone number (example)

2 = 2. internal phone number

1 and 2 = 1. and 2. internal phone numbers

"enter" confirm

Enter the call mode to which do not disturb is to apply:

1 = internal calls (example)

2 = external calls

1 and 2 = internal and external calls

"set": end programming.

You can turn the do not disturb mode on / off by pressing the "don’t disturb" key.

Do not disturb prim:>1< sec: 2

Do not disturb int: 1 ext: 2

Do not disturb int:>1< ext: 2

$

&

&

&

!

"Call variant 2" and "call variant 3" function keys (example: call variant 2)

"enter": confirm selection of the function.

"next": select the phone number or name of the S0 access for which the call variant is to be turned on / off

If you wish to turn the call variant on /off for

" all

" phone numbers

Select " without

" if the phone number is only to be selected when switching

"set": end programming

Call variant 2 enter next esc

Call variant 2 ext.23456781

Call variant 2 ext. AGFEO 2

Call variant 2 ext. all

Call variant 2 ext. without

2 - 13

2


$

"

!

$

"

"Voice Message" function key

"enter": confirm selection.

Enter the internal phone numbers of the system telephones that you wish to reach with a voice announcement. You may enter up to five internal phone numbers. Example:

14, 15

Refer to "Notes" for details of how to reach more than five internal users.


Function key for "pick up" of a call

"enter": confirm the selection

Enter the internal phone numbers of the internal users whose external and internal calls you wish to pick up. You may enter up to five internal phone numbers.

Example: 14, 15

Refer to "Notes" for details of how to pick up calls from more than five internal users.

Voice message enter next esc

Enter telephone

-- -- -- -- --

Enter telephone

14 15 -- -- --

Pick up enter next esc

Enter telephone

-- -- -- -- --

Enter telephone

14 15 -- -- --

!

"set" end programming.

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

When using the "voice message" or "pick up" functions, you can reach more than five internal users if you enter the internal phone numbers of a user group.

The same first or second internal phone number can be assigned to several internal users. You create a user group that is accessible with the same internal phone number.

The "voice message" function key has a general function if you do not define any internal phone numbers. When operating the function key, you must then dial the internal phone numbers.

If you do not define any internal phone numbers for the "pick up" function key, when pressing the key you can only pick up external calls from all internal users.

2 - 14


2

$

"

!

"Internal key" function key

"enter": confirm selection

Internal key enter next esc

Internal key telephone --

Internal key telephone 13

Enter the internal phone number of the internal user you wish to reach directly by pressing the internal key. Example: 13


Internal user 13 is called when you press the internal key.

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

If you assign the internal phone number of an answering machine to an internal key, you can pick up a call from the answering machine by pressing that key.

The "internal key" function key has a general function if you do not assign any internal phone numbers. When operating the function key, you must then dial the internal phone number.

$

&

&

!

"MSN / external" function key


"next": select the phone number or name of the S0 access to which the "MSN" key is to apply

Select " without

" if the phone number is not to be selected until the key is pressed


MSN/external key enter next esc

MSN/external key ext. 23456781

MSN/external key ext. AGFEO 2

MSN/external key ext. without

2 - 15

2


$

"

!

"Relay" function key (AS 191 plus)


Enter the relay that you wish to switch with this key. Example: 12 (relay with the internal phone number 12)


Relay enter next esc

Relay relay number --

Relay relay number 12

2 - 16


2

Making telephone calls

Calling an internal user:

two different 2digit internal phone numbers can be assigned to each internal user of your telephone system by programming. If necessary, inquire with the programmer of your telephone system to find out which internal phone numbers have been assigned to which users.

You can agree on two different code calls with internal users of radio cells (base station with cordless telephones). For example, you can agree on who is meant or what is to be done when a code call rings.

If you dial the radio cell by way of the first internal phone number, all users of the radio cell are called with the tone ringing sequence of code call 1. If you dial the second internal phone number, they are rung with code call 2. The first user of the radio cell who picks up the receiver is connected to you.

Calling an external subscriber:

dial the external phone number directly if your system telephone is set to the automatic outside line seizure variant . The telephone automatically seizes a free outside line (free B channel).

When the "0" line seizure variant is set, you must first seize an outside line by dialling the code "0". You then dial the external phone number.

The external phone number (your phone number and your direct dialling in number or your multiple subscriber number, MSN) assigned to you is sent to the ISDN exchange when you seize the outside line.

Connection costs are then managed under this external phone number. This external phone number is also communicated to the party you call, provided communication of your phone number is active.

If you wish to manage connection costs via a different MSN, press the corresponding

MSN / external key to seize the outside line.

You can configure an MSN / external key on the system telephone for every MSN.

ISDN call forwarding is active if you hear the special dial tone of the ISDN exchange after seizing the outside line.

Making telephone calls - automatic outside line seizure variant ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

+

Lift the receiver. Your internal phone number is displayed.

-- 11/--

Please dial

%"

"

Calling an internal user

Press the "internal" key and dial the internal phone number, e.g. 13, to call telephone 13. If applicable, the name of user

13 is displayed.

Calling an external subscriber

Dial the external phone number directly. The telephone system automatically seizes an outside line (B channel).

If the called subscriber’s phone number differs from the dialled number, it appears above the dialled number (for example, the subscriber has diverted the connection).

Calling 13

ANTON

Calling

98765432

03098765123

98765432

2 - 17

2


Making telephone calls - "0" outside seizure variant ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

+


-- 11/--

Please dial

"

0

"

Calling an internal user

Dial the internal phone number, e.g. 13 to call telephone 13.

Calling an external subscriber

Press the 0 key to seize any outside line (B channel). On a point-to-point connection, your system phone number or on a point-to-multipoint connection, the multiple subscriber number assigned to you is displayed.

If applicable, a name is displayed instead of the multiple subscriber number. However, the phone number is sent.

You hear the external dial tone and you can then dial the phone number.

Calling 13 ext. 3456780

Please dial ext. 23456781

Please dial ext. AGFEO 2

Please dial

Calling

98765432

External seizure with the MSN / external key ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

%

Press the MSN /external key

MSN/external key

23456781

&

$

"

+

Press "next" to select the phone number or name of the S0 access that you wish to seize.

The cost of the connection is charged to that phone number.

Press "enter" to confirm selection of the phone number. Example: 23456782

Enter the phone number of the required subscriber

Lift the receiver. The phone number is dialled.

MSN/external key ext. SALES ext. 23456782

ext.23456782

98765432

Calling

98765432

2 - 18


2

External seizure with special MSN / external key ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

+


-- 11/--

Please dial

%

Press the MSN / external key to seize an outside line. The costs of the connection are charged to this phone number. Example:

23456782

If applicable, a name is displayed instead of the phone number. However, the phone number is sent.

ext. 23456782

Dial number ext. Sales

Dial number

" You hear the external dial tone and you can then dial the phone number.

Calling

98765432

Reserving an outside line ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

All outside lines are busy if you hear the busy tone after external seizure. Reserve an outside line. As soon as an outside line is free, the telephone system will ring you.

After picking up the receiver, you hear the external dial tone and you can enter the internal phone number.

"

B-channel busy reserve ?

$

-

A

You hear the busy tone when dialling an external phone number. The display shows this message. No outside line (B channel) is free.

Press the "enter" key to reserve an outside line.


Reservation call of the telephone system.

Reservation confirmed

Xi 11:52

13 15 16 17 23

Your line

A

"

Lift the receiver. You hear the external dial tone.

Dial the external phone number ext. 23456781

Please dial

Calling

98765432

2 - 19

2


Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Barred range - If the telephone system’s barred range is programmed for your telephone, you cannot dial the external phone numbers that lie within the barred range. You hear the error tone.

DTMF post-dialling - Is possible for all existing external connections, even in an inquiry, when brokering and during a threeparty conference. You can post-dial digits and characters (

1

...

0

,

*

and

#

)

Hand free - Instead of lifting the receiver, you can also press the "loudspeaker" key in all cases. You are then telephoning in the hands free mode. Hands free mode is turned off if you lift the receiver during the call. You can conduct the call through the receiver. To switch to the hands free mode, press the "loudspeaker" key until you have replaced the receiver. To end the call, press the "loudspeaker" key.

Preparing dialling - The receiver is on the hook. Enter the phone number. The entered phone number is displayed. Your system telephone begins dialling automatically when you pick up the receiver or when you press the "loudspeaker" key.

Open listening - Via the built-in loudspeaker other pe´rsons in the room may listen to the call you are conductimg through the receiver. to do this, press the

"loudspeaker" key.

Dialling with the receiver on the hook -

Press the "loudspeaker" key and dial the phone number. Lift the receiver when the other party answers.

Reserving an outside line - The system telephone emits a short signal and Your line appears in the display for 4 minutes if the reserved outside line is free.

2 - 20


2

Accepting calls

You are called ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Thanks to different ringing rhythms, you can distinguish between internal calls, external calls, and door calls. Before you lift the receiver, you can also see on your system telephone’s display where the call is coming from.

Internal call:

in the display, you see where the call is coming from. You can enter the name on any system telephone.

from KELLER for HAUPT

+

Lift the receiver. The name or, for example, telephone 13 is displayed

KELLER

External call:

the first line of the display shows the caller’s phone number, e.g.

03098765432

, or the entry in the telephone system’s phonebook if there is an entry for the phone number, e.g.

MAIER

.

In the second line of the display, you can see an

N

= new call, the phone number of the point-to-point connection with the dialled

DDI number or the MSN that has been called or the name instead of the MSN.

03098765432

N: 23456781

MAIER

N: 23456781

MAIER

N: AGFEO

+

The first user to lift the receiver is connected to the caller. The phone number or the name of the caller is shown in the display.

MAIER

-- -- -- -- --

A waiting call is announced to you ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

While you are making a telephone call, a second call arrives. In the receiver, you hear the internal knocking tone (internal call) once or the external knocking tones (external call) several times. You can accept the second call or you can reject the knocking call.

A

-

A

You are making an internal or an external telephone call. Example: external. You hear the external knocking tones in the receiver.

The second line of the display shows the phone number of the name of second caller.

Accepting the second call

1st possibility - replace the receiver to end the current call. Your telephone rings. You are connected to the new call.

MAIER

03087654321

03087654321

N: 23456781

+

Lift the receiver. You are connected to the caller.

03087654321

-- -- -- -- --

2 - 21

2


%

/

A

2nd possibility - press the "brokering" key .

The first call (

MAIER

) is placed on hold. You are connected to the second caller and you can broker between both calls or you can forward the call.

Rejecting the waiting (knocking) call

Press the "reject" key . The caller now hears the busy tone instead of the ringing tone if you have been called as the only party. The caller continues to hear the ringing tone if several users are called according to a ringing distribution configuration.

Continue the call

03087654321

MAIER

2 - 22


2

Forwarding a call

You can forward an external call to an internal user or to another external subscriber. When forwarding internally, after dialling you can first announce the external call or you can replace the receiver immediately.

Internal forwarding with and without announcement ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A

%"

You are conducting an external telephone conversation and you wish to forward the call to an internal user.

Dial the internal user


Press the internal key and dial the internal phone number, e.g. 13.

MAIER

-- -- -- -- --

Calling 13 r"

A

-

(

(

$-

"0" Outside line seizure variant

Press the "inquiry" key and dial the internal phone number, e.g. 13

If the internal user does not answer, you switch back to the external subscriber by pressing the "brokering" or the "esc" key.

Forwarding with announcement

Internal subscriber answers the call announce the external call.

Replace the receiver. Internal subscriber 13 and external subscriber are now connected to each other.

Internal subscriber does not answer by pressing the „esc“ key you switch back to the external subscriber. You may forward the external call to another internal subscriber.

Internal subscriber is busy by pressing the „esc“ key you switch back to the external subscriber. Otherwise you will be connected to the external subscriber automatically after 10 seconds. You may forward the external call to another internal subscriber or by pressing the „enter“ key park the connection and replace the receiver.

If the internal subscriber replaces the receiver, he gets the external call of the waiting external subscriber.

Calling 13

Telephone 13

MAIER

MAIER

-- -- -- -- -parking ?

enter x- 11:52

13 -- -- -- --

2 - 23

2


-

A

Forwarding without announcement

Replace the receiver before the internal user answers. The called user’s display shows the phone number dialled by the external subscriber, the external subscriber’s phone number and, if applicable, the person’s name.

If the internal user picks up the receiver, he is then connected to the external subscriber.

You receive an automatic call backimmediately if the internal subscriber is busy or his don´t disturb is activated, after 45 seconds if the internal subscriber does not answer.

Ringing is cancelled after 60 seconds if you do not accept a call back.

MAIER

N: 23456781

External forwarding ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A

You are conducting an external telephone conversation and you wish to forward the call to an external subscriber.

x- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

%"

A

%

Dial up the external subscriber to whom you wish to connect.

Press the "brokering" key and dial the external phone number. External subscriber 1 waits and, if applicable, he hears music on hold.

If the called party does not answer, you switch back to the waiting external subscriber

1 by pressing the "esc" key.

You conduct a conversation with the new external subscriber. The waiting subscriber cannot listen in.

Press the "transfer" key (this must be programmed) to transfer the call.

Calling

87654321

87654321

MAIER x- 11/--

Please dial

Replace the receiver x- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

External / external forwarding is only possible if at least one external call is an incoming call. Both outside lines (both B channels) are seized.

Connection charges are charged to your subscriber connection for the external connection you have established.

2 - 24


2

Forwarding an outside line

You can forward an outside line to an internal user. An internal user who is otherwise not allowed to make external calls

(user with external call privilege 5 - accept incoming calls only) can now dial an external phone number with your external call privilege.

Forwarding an outside line ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A

You were called by an internal subscriber.

Your call partner, who is otherwise not allowed to make external telephone calls, would like to have an outside line switched.

Telephone 16

-- -- -- -- --

%

Press the "brokering" key . You hear the external dial tone of the free outside line.

ext. 23456781

Please dial

%

-

Press the "transfer" key . You have transferred the free outside line. The internal user can dial an external phone number.

Replace the receiver.

Call delivered please hang up x- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

2 - 25

2


Call waiting announcement (knocking)/callback

By means of call waiting announcement

(knocking), you can make yourself noticeable to a busy internal user. You hear the internal knocking tone. In his conversation, the other party hears the internal knocking tone. Your call is switched through immediately to the required party if he hangs up.

If he does not accept your call or if he has activated do not disturb on his telephone, you initiate a callback when you replace the receiver.

You receive the automatic callback as soon as the other party is free again. Your telephone rings. You only need to lift the receiver, and the other party is then called automatically.

Initiating call waiting announcement (knocking)/callback ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A

You have called user 13, for example, who is busy, though

Telephone 13 is busy

$

-

You want to announce your waiting call to the busy internal user and you may wish to initiate a callback.

Press the "enter" key. Your waiting call is announced to the busy user.

You hear the internal knocking tone.

Replace the receiver. You initiate a callback if your call has not been accepted.

Call waiting x- 11:52

13 -- -- -- --

Callback ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A

As soon as the other user is free again, your telephone rings and your display shows the

"callback".

Callback from 13

For telephone 11

A

Calling 13

-

Lift the receiver. Telephone 13 is automatically called again.

The other user answers:

You conduct the telephone conversation in the usual way.

The other user does not answer:

When you replace the receiver, you enter yourself in the call list.


Telephone 13

13 -- -- -- --

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

2 - 26


2

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Pay attention to the messages on your system telephone’s display. The respective function - knocking, callback, call list - is displayed.

callback is cancelled after 60 seconds.

- A callback is cleared if the callback call has not come into being.

Knocking - you cannot announce your waiting call to an internal user

- From whom a callback is already expected,

- Whose connection is set to the answering machine, fax, modem or combined unit terminal type

Callback in general: you have activated a callback:

- If do not disturb is activated on your telephone, this is temporarily cancelled.

- If call diversion is configured on your telephone, the callback will not be diverted.

Callback - you can initiate several callbacks in succession (from every internal user).

You cannot initiate a callback from an internal user

- From whom another user is expecting a callback,

- Who has activated do not disturb,

- Whose connection is set to the answering machine, fax, modem or combined unit terminal type.

Callback from a user with a standard telephone:

- If you do not pick up the receiver, the

Callback from a user with a system telephone:

- If you do not pick up the receiver, your call will be entered in the other user’s call list after 60 seconds.

- If you are busy, your call will be entered immediately in the other user’s call list.

- If the other user picks up the receiver during the callback, your call is immediately entered in the other user’s call list.

Power failure: initiated calls back and call lists are cleared.

2 - 27

2



While you are conducting a telephone conversation, internal users and external subscribers can announce their waiting calls.

You hear the knocking tone in your conversation. If you do not want anyone to announce their waiting calls to you, activate call waiting prevention on your telephone.

External callers hear the busy tone if your telephone has been rung as the only one and no internal call forwarding (call variant

3) is set.

Call waiting prevention - programming and switching ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!/

Enter "set" and press the "call waiting prevention" key or enter "set 14" to set up call waiting prevention. This display message appears when a 1 st

and 2 nd

internal phone number (primary and secondary) are defined for your telephone.

Call wait. prev.

prim: 1 sec: 0

"

"1": call waiting prevention for 1 st

internal phone number and/or

"2": call waiting prevention for 2 nd

internal phone number

Example: "1" and "2"

Call wait. prev.

prim:>1< sec:>0<

$

Call waiting on: 1 off:>0<

"

!

With "enter" to switch the call waiting prevention on/off. The current setting is marked.

"1": Call waiting prevention on

"0": Call waiting prevention off

Example: "1"


Call waiting on:>1< off: 0

Call waiting prevention on/off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

-/

The receiver is on the hook. By pressing the

„call waiting prevention“ key you activate/ deactivate the programmed call waiting prevention.

Call waiting on

2 - 28


2

Picking up calls

Another telephone rings with an external or an internal ringing tone. You can pick up the call on your telephone.

If the answering machine has accepted an external call, you can pick up this external call on your telephone.

Picking up an external call ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A

Another telephone rings. The x in the display flashes. You wish to pick up the external call.

x- 11:52

13 -- -- -- --

+$

Lift the receiver. Press the "enter" key. You are now connected to the caller and can conduct the telephone conversation in the usual fashion.

0309876543

-- -- -- -- --

Picking up an external/internal call ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A

You hear that telephone 13, for example, is called.

-- 11:52

13 --15 -- --

+%

Lift the receiver and press the "pick up" key .

You are now connected to the caller (telephone 15) and can conduct a telephone conversation in the usual fashion.

Telephone 15

Picking up a call from an answering machine ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A

An external call has activated the answering machine (e.g. internal phone number 23).

x- 11:52

-- -- -- -- 23

+

%"

+"


Lift the receiver, press the internal key and the internal phone number 23, for example, to accept the call. You are connected to the caller and can conduct a telephone conversation in the usual manner.

"0" outsize line seizure variant

Lift the receiver and dial the internal phone number 23, for example, if you wish to pick up the call. You are connected to the caller and you can conduct a telephone conversation in the usual fashion.

0309876543

-- -- -- -- --

0309876543

-- -- -- -- --

2 - 29

2


Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

With a general "pick up" function key (see

"Function key assignments"), you can only pick up external calls from all internal users.

users. You can program the user group by pressing "set" and "pick up key".

You cannot pick up calls back and recalls.

With a special "pick up" function key (with selected internal users), you can pick up external and internal calls from the defined

You can only pick up a call from an answering machine if the connection is set to the

"answering machine" terminal type.

2 - 30


2

Call list

If you do not accept a call by an external subscriber, the caller’s transmitted phone number, the time and the date are entered in your call list. The transmitted phone number is also compared against the entries in the phonebook. If they agree, the name is displayed instead of the phone number.

If you call an internal user on a system telephone that is free and if the user does not answer, you can enter yourself in this user’s telephone’s call list .

The call list contains up to 10 entries. If a further call arrives, the oldest entry is cleared. Otherwise, the entry is stored until you dial or clear the phone number concerned. Every phone number appears only once in the call list. If someone calls whose phone number is already in the list, the time information is updated.

You can display the phone numbers in your call list and you can dial them simply by lifting the receiver.

If you deactivate the call list, only internal calls will be entered, but no external calls.

Call list on/off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!2*

Enter "set 2 * " to configure the call list.


List of calls a:>0<e: 1 nN: 2

"

-

"0": Call list off for external calls

"1": Call list on. All calls are entered, i.e.

calls with a phone number and calls with names (callers whose names are in the telephone system’s phonebook).

"2": Only calls with names are entered in the call list, example: "1"

List of calls a: 0 e:>1<nN: 2

!

"Set": conclude programming.

Entering yourself in a call list ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A

You have called internal user 13, for example, who does not answer, though.

Call in 13

$

You wish to enter yourself in the call list of this user’s system telephone.

Press the "enter" key.

List of calls

Replace the receiver. You have entered yourself in the call list.

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

2 - 31

2


Displaying a call list ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

-

The receiver is on the hook. On the display, you see the "!" symbol indicating that a message is available. The red LED also flashes.

-- 11!52

-- -- -- -- --

¡ ¶

&&

There is at least one entry in the call list.

List of calls read enter

¡ ¶

$

Scrolling:

Dialling:

&

+

To see the first entry:

Press the "enter" key. On the display, you see an external phone number and the date/time of the last call or the entry in the phonebook (name) and the date/time of the last call or a reminder to call an internal user and the date/time of the last call.

Now, you have several possibilities

Scroll with the "next" key to see further entries. The LED flashes until you call or clear the entry.

Lift the receiver. The displayed phone number is dialled automatically.

If the other user answers, the entry is cleared from the call list.

If the other user does not answer, the entry remains.

0521987654 from 9:55 20. 3.

¡ ¶

ENGINEERING from 9:55 20. 3.

¡ ¶

Telephone 13 from 9:55 20. 3.

¡ ¶

0301234567 from 9:12 20. 3

¡ ¶

Calling

0301234567

¡ ¡

Clearing:

?

Press the "clear" key. You clear the displayed entry.

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

By pressing "esc", you cancel the display of the call list.

network" privilege. In this case, the "local range/privilege 3" should be enabled for you and your own local area code should be entered.

As the phone number is entered in the call list with the prefix, it may happen that you cannot dial the phone number directly out of the call list if you only have the "local

The call list is not stored in the event of a power failure.

2 - 32


2

Do not disturb - turning off tone ringing

You can turn off tone ringing (do not disturb) for the first internal phone number and/or the second internal phone number by which your telephone is obtainable.

Then, internal calls will only be indicated to you by the display and the flashing red LED.

External calls are not displayed.

You can activate do not disturb for internal calls, external calls or for all calls. If an internal user calls you from a system telephone, a corresponding message appears on this user’s display. External subscribers hear the busy tone.

Do not disturb on ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

-%

The receiver is on the hook. Press the "do not disturb" key . This turns on do not disturb. As a check, the red LED lights up and your display shows for 20 seconds the "Do not disturb on" message.

Do not disturb on

¡ “

Do not disturb off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

-%

The receiver is on the hook. Press the "do not disturb" key . This turns off do not disturb if it was on. The red LED is off. Your display shows for 20 seconds the " Do not disturb switched off " .

Do not disturb switched off

¡ ¡

Programming and switching do not disturb ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!12

You initiate the function by entering "set 12".

This display message appears if a first and second internal phone number (primary and secondary) have been defined for your telephone.

Do not disturb prim: 1 sec: 2

"

"1": Do not disturb for first internal number and/or

"2": Do not disturb for second internal number. Example: "1" and "2"

Do not disturb prim:>1< sec:>2<

$

"

!

Press "enter" to confirm. Define whether do not disturb is to apply to internal and/or external calls.

"1" : Do not disturb for internal calls and/or

"2": Do not disturb for external calls

Example: "1" do not disturb for internal calls only

You activate the setting by pressing "set".

With the "do not disturb" key, you can later simply turn the do not disturb set in this way on or off.

Dont dist. 11/21 int:>1< ext.:>2<

¡ ¡

Dont dist. 11/21 int:>1< ext.: 2

¡ ¡

-- 11!52

-- -- -- -- --

¡ “

2 - 33

2


Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

If you have activated do not disturb:

- Corresponding calls are only shown in the display and indicated by flashing of the red LED. Your telephone does not ring.

However, you can accept the calls in the usual fashion.

- You can still make calls. When you pick up the receiver, the special dial tone reminds you that do not disturb is on.

- Your telephone nevertheless rings in the event of a callback, a wake up call and an appointment call.

You can program several special "do not disturb" function keys. You can program a

"do not disturb" function key for your first internal phone number, for your second internal phone number, for both your internal phone numbers, for internal calls, for external calls and for all calls (see

"Function key assignments").

2 - 34


2

Switching over the call variant

When an external call arrives, one telephone or several telephones ring(s) simultaneously.

The called internal user who lifts the receiver first is connected to the caller. Which telephones are to ring is defined by programming in the ringing distribution configuration.

Different ringing distribution settings are possible for the daytime and night-time thanks to call variants (call variants 1 and 2).

You can activate/deactivate call variant 2

(night service) separately for each external phone number in your telephone system, and from every internal or external telephone. Please refer to the operating instructions for analog terminals -

"Switching over the call variant" - for details of how to switch over the call variant from an external telephone.

When call variant 2 is deactivated, call variant 1 (daytime service) is on.

Call variant 2 on/off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!%

Enter "set" and press the "call variant 2"

(night) key or enter "set 11" to activate call variant 2 (night service).

Call variant 2 next/externalno.

&

Press "next" to select the external phone number in yor telephone system or ext. 23456781 on: 1 off:>0<

&

Select the name of the external phone number or ext. AGFEO on: 1 off:>0<

& ext. all on: 1 off:>0

"

"

All

" if you wish to activate/deactivate the call variant for " all

" external phone numbers

In the example, the external phone number

23456781 is selected.

"1": Call variant 2 on

"0": Call variant 2 off

Example: "1" - on ext. 23456781 on: 1 off:>0< ext. 23456781 on:>1< off: 0

!

"Next", select and switch further call variant 2 or door call variant 2 or

"set" : end programming

-- ≈ 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

2 - 35

2


Call variant 2 on/off with special function key ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

If you have permanently assigned a phone number when configuring the "call variant

2" function key, you can activate/deactivate

+

The receiver is on the hook.

call variant 2 for this external phone number simply by pressing the "AVA 2" (night) key.

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

AVA 2

/

Call variant 2 ext.AGFEO

AVA 2

(

/

(

Press the "AVA 2" (night) key. Call variant 2 is now on .

Return to the standard display. As a check, you see the moon symbol in the display and the "!" symbol.

Press the "AVA 2" (night) key. The call variant 2 is now off if it was on beforehand.

Return to the standard display. The moon symbol and the "!" symbol in the display is off. Call variant 1 (daytime service) is on.

-- ≈ 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

AVA2 off ext.AGFEO

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

The "!" symbol may stand for several settings in your telephone system. If necessary, you can display the settings by pressing & several times.

Press $ to indicate the external phone number to which the setting applies.

You can deactivate (switch off) the displayed setting

?

with clear.

If the selection "ext. all" is set up when call variant 2 is switched on/off, door call variant


2 - 36


2

Activating or deactivating call variant 3

(internal call forwarding)

If you activate call variant 3 (internal call forwarding), the telephone system forwards an external call to other internal terminals.

Call forwarding takes place:

- After a defined number of rings if nobody answers

- Immediately if the telephone is busy and call waiting announcement is not possible.

You can activate/deactivate call variant 3 separately at any time for any external phone number in your telephone system, and from any internal or external telephone.

Please refer to the operating instructions for analog terminals - "Activating/deactivating call variant 3" - for details of how to activate/deactivate the call variant from an external telephone.

The call forwarding terminals are defined for each external phone number in your telephone system by programming the ringing distribution settings - call variant 3.

Call variant 3 on/off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!%

Enter "set" and press the "call variant 3" key or "set 19" to activate call forwarding

Forwarding next/external ..

&

&

&

Select the external phone number by pressing

"next" or

Select the name of the external phone number or

" all

" if you wish to activate/deactivate call forwarding for " all

" external phone numbers ext. 23456781 on: 1 off:>0< ext. AGFEO on: 1 off:>0< ext. all on: 1 off:>0

"

!



"1": Call forwarding on

"0": Call forwarding off

Example: "1" - on

"Next": select and switch a further call variant 3 or

"Set": conclude programming ext. 23456781 on: 1 off:>0< ext. 23456781 on:>1< off: 0

-- 11!52

-- -- -- -- --

2 - 37

2


Call variant 3 on/off with a special function key ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

If you have permanently assigned a external phone number of your telephone system when configuring the "call variant 3"

+


function key, you can simply activate/ deactivate call variant 3 (internal call forwarding) by pressing the "AVA 3" key.

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

AVA 3

/

(

Press the "AVA 3" (call forwarding key) .

Call variant 3 is now on .

Return to the standard display. As a check, you see the "

!

" symbol in the display.

Call variant 3 ext.AGFEO

-- 11!52

-- -- -- -- --

AVA 3

/

(

Press the "AVA 3" (call forwarding) key .

Call variant 3 is now off if it was on beforehand.

Return to the standard display. The "

!

" symbol in the display is off.

AVA3 off ext.AGFEO

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

The "!" symbol may stand for several settings in your telephone system. If necessary, you can display the settings by pressing & several times. Press $ to indicate the external phone number to which the setting applies.

You can deactivate (switch off) the displayed setting

?

with clear.

2 - 38


2

Forwarding a call during ringing

You can divert an external call on your system telephone to another internal extension or external subscriber while the phone is ringing. Then you do not have to answer the call.

To be able to divert calls to an external subscriber the ISDN „Call Deflection” feature must be available on your local exchange and be enabled for the line.

Forwarding a call during ringing ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

R

An external call comes in. The display identifies the caller.

MAIER cl.: Office

/

Press the ” call deflection“ key.

You can forward the call to an internal or external phone number.

Call deflection int: 1 ext: 2

2

Select forwarding to an external phone number, for example.

Call deflection

_

"

Key in the external number you want to forward to, choose an entry from the phonebook or press a speed dial key.

Call deflection

61793015

$

Press ”enter”. The call is forwarded to the external number you selected. The call to your system is cleared.

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

Rejecting a call during ringing ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

/

Press the "reject" key . The caller now hears the busy tone instead of the ringing tone if you have been called as the only party. The caller continues to hear the ringing tone if several users are called according to a ringing distribution configuration.

Call forwarding for extensions on the point to point connection ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

The ISDN ”Call Deflection” feature can be used to implement call forwarding for extensions on the point to point connection

(Partial Rerouting). For this, the ”Partial

Rerouting” box under ”Customisation” in the ”TK-Set” program must be checked.

If you program a diversion to an external subscriber from the extension, the system does not divert the call to the external party over the second B-channel. The call is diverted by the exchange during the ring phase.

2 - 39

2


Announcement

From your telephone, you can make an announcement via an audio module or a loudspeaker system.

The audio module or the loudspeaker system is connected a port for analog terminal.

Announcement ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

-%

+

The receiver is on the hook. Press the

"announcement" key . The acknowledgement tone sounds.

You can make your announcement in the hands free mode or you can use the receiver.

Announcement

Speak now

¶ ¡

= or -

After the announcement: Press the "loudspeaker" key or replace the receiver.

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

¡ ¡

2 - 40


2

Autodial - connecting without dialling

You can activate "autodial" on your telephone for an emergency. When you pick up the receiver, and if you then do not press any keys, after 10 seconds the telephone system will automatically dial a stored external phone number. Up to that time, you can dial any other phone number in the normal fashion. In this case, autodial is then suppressed.

Autodial - Programming a phone number ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!56

Initiate input

"

Enter the external phone number, e.g.

987654

Enter number

-

Enter number

987654-

!

"Set": conclude programming

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Check automatic dialling after programming the external phone number. Activate automatic dialling, lift the receiver, wait until the external phone number is dialled and check that you have the right connection.

Autodial on/off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!1*

Initiate the function

Autodial on: 1 off:>0<

"

Autodial on:>1< off: 0

!

"1": On

"0": Off. Example: "1"

"Set": conclude programming

Automatic dialling is now prepared.

You hear the special dial tone when you lift the receiver.

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

If the called party is busy, the telephone system attempts to redial the external phone number every 10 seconds. It cancels automatic dialling after 12 attempts.

If you hear the error tone when activating

"automatic dialling", then no external phone number has been programmed.

2 - 41

2


Activating/deactivating busy on busy

An external subscriber calls your phone number, for which ringing distribution to several terminals has been programmed.

The terminals that are free ring. You are busy and there is no-one there who can accept the call. The caller hears the ringing tone. To avoid a situation in which the caller has the impression that there is nobody there, you can activate the "busy on busy" feature for your phone number. A caller will hear the busy tone as soon as one user in the ringing distribution settings is busy.

Busy on busy - programming and switching ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!/

Enter "set" and press the "busy on busy" key or "set 1#" to initiate the function.

Busy on Busy next/Externalno.

&

&

Select the external phone number with

"next" or

Select the name of the external phone number ext. 23456781 on: 1 off:>0< ext. AGFEO on: 1 off:>0<

"

!



"1": Busy on busy on

"0": Busy on busy off

Example: "1" - on

"Next", select external phone numbers and set busy tone on busy or

"Set": conclude programming ext. 23456781 on: 1 off:>0< ext. 23456781 on:>1< off: 0

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

Busy on busy on/off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

-/

The receiver is on the hook. By pressing the

„busy on busy“ key you activate/deactivate the programmed function.

Busy On Busy off ext. 23456781

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

An ISDN terminal that is connected in parallel with the telephone system on the point-to-multipoint connection and to which the same phone number as that of the telephone system is assigned is always called regardless of whether "busy on busy" has been activated or deactivated for this phone number in the telephone system. The caller hears the ringing tone.

2 - 42


2

Voice message/intercom system function

You can use your telephone system like an intercom system, i.e. you can make voice message announcements to other system telephones in your system in the form of an

- Announcement to one or several selected system telephones

- Announcement to a defined group of system telephones (see "Group formation").

In doing so, the loudspeakers of the system telephones concerned are switched on automatically (unless the telephones are currently busy).

You can also make each voice message announcement out of an external call.

A voice message is only possible if you have programmed the function on a "voice message" function key (see "Function key assignments").

Voice message to system telephones ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

-%

The receiver is on the hook. Press the "voice message" key . You can now choose who is to hear your voice message.

Voice message

-- -- -- -- --

"

Enter the phone numbers of the telephone systems that you wish to reach (up to 5 system telephones).

Voice message

13 22 -- -- --

$

+

Press the "enter" key for a voice message in the hands free mode or use the receiver.

If at least one of the selected system telephones is free, you and the announcement participant hear the acknowledgement tone.

You can announce your voice message.

Voice message

Speak now

¶ ¡

=

or

-

When a called user lifts the receiver, only this user is connected to you in an internal connection. The voice message is ended. You can talk with this user in the usual fashion.

After the voice message: press the "loudspeaker" key or replace the receiver. This ends the operation.

Telephone 13

13 -- -- -- --

¶ ¡

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

¡ ¡

2 - 43

2


Group voice message ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

-% or

+

The receiver is on the hook. Press the "voice message" key. If at least one of the system telephones belonging to the defined group is free, you and the voice message participants hear the acknowledgement tone.

You can make your voice message announcement in the hands free mode or you can use the receiver.

When a called user lifts the receiver, only this user is connected to you in an internal connection. The voice message is ended. You can talk with this user in the usual fashion.

Voice message

Speak now

¶

Telephone 13

13 -- -- -- --

¶

¡

¡

=

or

-

After the voice message: press the "loudspeaker" key or replace the receiver. This ends the operation.

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

¡ ¡

Voice message out of an external call ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A

You are conducting an external telephone conversation and you wish to announce the call to an internal user, but you do not know what telephone this user is currently at.

98765432

-- -- -- -- --

%

Press the "voice message" key . If at least one of the system telephones belonging to the defined group is free, you and the voice message participants hear the acknowledgement tone. You can make your voice message announcement.

Voice message

Speak now

-

If the internal user you are looking for has heard the voice message and lifts the receiver, only this user is connected to you in an internal connection. The voice message is ended. You can talk with this user in the usual fashion.

To transfer the call to the internal user, replace the receiver. The two other parties are connected to one another. If you replace the receiver before the internal user has lifted the receiver, you have also transferred the call. The call can be picked up from any telephone within 4 minutes. After 4 minutes, you receive a callback if the call has not been accepted.

Telephone 13

98765432 x- 11:52

13 -- -- -- --

2 - 44


2

When you hear a telephone voice message ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You hear the acknowledgement tone and then a voice message.

Voice message 13 for telephone 11

=

=

or

or

+

-

If you wish to speak to the person announcing the message:

Press the "loudspeaker" key or lift the receiver. Only you are then connected with this person in an internal connection.

If you are the only voice message participant and if you have activated automatic activation of your hands free microphone, you can immediately talk with the person making the voice message announcement in a hands free connection.

Press the "loudspeaker" key or replace the receiver. The call is ended.

Telephone 13

¶ ¡

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

¡ ¡

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A voice message announcement to telephones is only possible to system telephones. At least one of the selected system telephones must be free.

person making the announcement. He is automatically in hands free mode with that person and two-way communication is possible.

If an user has activated automatic activation of the hands free microphone on his system telephone (see "System telephone settings"), when a single voice message announcement is made he no longer needs to pick up the receiver to speak to the

You can vary the voice message volume by entering the "Open listening volume" key.

You can directly enter the participants of a group voice message by means of the "set" and "voice message" keys.

2 - 45

2


Placing a connection on hold

On a point-to-multipoint connection only - you can have your external call placed on hold by the ISDN exchange in order to conduct an inquiry call with a second external subscriber on the same outside line.

While you are conducting a telephone conversation with an external subscriber, you wish to obtain information from a second external subscriber, for example, although no further outside line is free. You then switch back to the first call.

You can also switch between both external calls (brokering).

Placing a connection on hold ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A

You are conducting an external telephone conversation (point-to-multipoint connection)

98765432

-- -- -- -- --

%

Press the "ISDN hold" key . You hear the external dial tone.

ext. 23456781

Please dial

"

Dial the phone number of the external subscriber with whom you wish to conduct an inquiry.

Calling

0234567899

A

The waiting subscriber cannot listen in. By showing the phone number, the display indicates that you are conducting a conversation with subscriber 2.

If the called subscriber does not answer, you can switch back to the waiting party by pressing the "esc".

0234567899

-- -- -- -- --

%

By pressing the "ISDN hold" key , you can switch between both external calls

(brokering).

98765432

-- -- -- -- --

(

By pressing "esc", you clear the current external call and you can speak immediately with the waiting external subscriber.

0234567899

-- -- -- -- --

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

The call cannot be placed on hold in the exchange if you hear the error tone instead of the external dial tone. You are connected back to the external subscriber when you press the "esc" key.

When you replace the receiver, you clear both the current call and the one that is on hold.


2 - 46


2

Identifying malicious callers (malicious call tracing)

You can only use the "identifying malicious callers" feature after specially ordering this feature from your network carrier.

The ISDN exchange stores the caller’s phone number, your phone number, the date and the time of the call. You can trace the caller during a call.

Tracing a caller ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A

External

You are being molested by a caller and you wish to have this caller identified by the exchange.

%

Press the "call tracing" key . You hear the exchange acknowledgement tone.

Call tracing


-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Press the "esc" key if you wish to continue the call after identifying the caller.

Up to the time when you continue or cancel the call with the caller, the caller hears a tune if "music on hold" (MoH) is activated in the telephone system or is fed in from an external source.

You hear the error tone:

- If you have not requested identification of malicious callers.

- If the caller can no longer be identified by the exchange.

2 - 47

2


Conference

Conducting a conference in the telephone system.

As the conference leader, you can:

- conduct a three-party conference with analog internal subscribers or with internal subscribers connected to the internal S0-bus or

- Conduct a three-party conference with one external subscriber and one internal user or

- Conduct a three-party conference with two external subscribers. In doing so, two outside lines are seized.

Conducting a conference in the ISDN exchange (point-to-multipoint only)

To establish an ISDN three-party conference with two external subscribers, you must first place the first external call on hold in the

ISDN exchange in order to conduct an inquiry conversation with a second external subscriber on the same outside line. You then switch both parties together in a threeparty conference.

Internal three-party conference ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A

You are conducting an internal call

Telephone 13

13 -- -- -- --

Call the internal user who you wish to fetch into the conference e.g. 17.

%" r"

A


Press the internal key and dial the internal phone number, e.g. 17

"0" outside line seizure variant

Press the "inquiry" function key and dial the internal phone number, e.g. 17

User 17 has picked up

Calling 17

Calling 17

Telephone 17

Telephone 13

%A

When you press the "conference" key , the participants in the conference hear the acknowledgement tone.

Telephone 17

Telephone 13

Internal/external three-party conference ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A


03098765432

-- -- -- -- --

Call further external subscribers or internal users that you wish to fetch into the conference.

Example: three-party conference - one internal user and two external subscribers.

2 - 48


2

%"

A

Press the "brokering" key and dial the external phone number.

The external subscriber has picked up.

Calling

0301234654

0301234654

03098765432

0301234654

Conference

%A

When you press the "conference" key , the participants in the conference hear the acknowledgement tone.

ISDN three-party conference ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A

You are conducting an external telephone conversation (point-to-multipoint connection) and simultaneously wish to speak with a further external subscriber.

98765432

-- -- -- -- --

%

Press the "ISDN hold" key . You hear the external dial tone.

Please dial

"

Dial the phone number of the external subscriber with whom you wish to inquiry.

Calling

0234567899

A

You can announce the three-party conference if the called party answers. The waiting party cannot listen in.

If the called party does not answer, you can switch back to the waiting party by pressing the "esc" key.

0234567899

-- -- -- -- ---

%

Conference

If the other party answers, you can talk with both external subscribers after pressing the

"conference" key .

-

You end the three-party conference if you replace the receiver.

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

2 - 49

2


Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Conference circuit in the telephone system

An external or door call is signalled to the conference with the call waiting announcement (knocking) tone if the called party is in the conference.

Only the conference leader can pick up a call by pressing the "brokering" key and selecting the call with the "next" key. The other conference members are on hold, but the conference is terminated. After the conference leader finished the inquiry call by

"esc", he can add the members on hold by

"brokering" and "conference" key.

Conference circuit in the ISDN exchange

Call charges are incurred for every external call that participates in the three-party conference.

It is not possible to place a call on hold in the exchange if you hear the error tone instead of the external dial tone. You are connected back to the external subscriber after pressing the "esc" key.

The three-party conference is not possible if you hear the error tone after pressing the

"conference" key. You are connected back to the second external subscriber after pressing the "esc" key.

A party is switched out of the conference if he replaces the receiver. He can only be fetched back into the conference by the conference leader.

The conference is ended when the conference leader replaces the receiver.

Press the "conference" key if you wish to clear an existing ISDN three-party conference. You are connected to the party that you last dialled into the conference . The first party is placed on hold.

2 - 50


2

Least Cost Routing (LCR) – Cost-optimized telephoning

Since the opening up of the telecommunications market you can choose between various network providers and reduce your telephone costs thanks to the advantages of competition.

The Least Cost Router of the telecommunication system decides which network provider is the cheapest for your external connection on the basis if the local code you dial (tariff zone), the time of day and day of the week. Should the selected provider not offer a free line after a adjustable number of tries, the PBX automatically chooses a pre-defined alternative provider (fallback).

The network code for the current network provider is placed automatically in front of your dialed external phone number and dialed. You simply dial in the usual way.

The use profile of the Least Cost Router covers 8 network operators and 8 tariff zones with their own time of day and day of the week profile. You can enter and update the use profile with TK-LCR on the PC.

You can switch the Least Cost Routing on and off on your telephone.

Switching Least Cost Routing on/off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

/

Press the ”LCR” function key to activate or deactivate the LCR function for your phone.

Example shows LCR active.

LCR on

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You can decide which network provider is used for an external connection despite the

LCR being switched on:

The network code for the network operator is stored in the repeat dialing.

- Simply dial the network code of the desired network provider in front of the local code.

Important! Not all ISDN features were available to all network providers at the time these operating instructions went to print

(e.g. transferring the phone number to the called party, transferring the connection costs).

- You can dial the network provider with a programmed function key „Call by Call“ on the system telephone (see „Network code – Call by Call“).

2 - 51

2


Brokering - switching between several conversations

Brokering signifies switching between several conversations. Only ever one conversation is active. The telephone system places the others on hold. Waiting external subscribers may hear music on hold.

Brokering ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A

You are conducting a conversation and one or several call(s) is/are on hold.

First display line: telephone number or the name pertaining to the active conversation

Second display line: telephone number or the name pertaining to the next conversation on hold

"External -" if no telephone number is presented.

03012345678

Telephon 13

External 1

Telephon 13

%

&

&

Switching to the next conversation

Press the "brokering" key

If necessary, press the "brokering" key several times to selectively switch to a conversation or displaying the conversations on hold during the active conversation : (not possible in all national variants)

Press "next" to scroll

First display line: telephone number, name of the party or "External - "

Second display line: telephone number or name of the connection (of the line) hld.: conversation on hold cl.: newly arriving ringing con.: connected (active) conversation

The active conversation is automatically displayed again after around 10 seconds.

Telephon 13

03012345678

MAIER hld.: 23456789

Extern 2 cl.: AGFEO 1

03012345678 con.: AGFEO 2

%

Switching to the displayed conversation: press the "brokering" key . The displayed conversation is now active. The conversation that was previously active is on hold.

MAIER

03012345678

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


To finally end a current call, press the "esc" key. You are automatically connected to the next party who is still waiting.

If you replace the receiver:

- you clear all internal connections,

- you clear the current external connection,

- you receive a callback if an external connection is still on hold.

2 - 52

Memory - storing a phone number


2

The phone number and, if applicable, the name of the party in the last incoming or outgoing external connection is stored automatically in the memory.

You can store every external phone number and every name in the memory that is shown on the display when the receiver is on the hook.

Later, you can display the entry and you can automatically dial the phone number by picking up the receiver.

When editing phone numbers, e.g. in the phone book, when diverting calls or when configuring destination keys, you can simply use the phone number and the name from the memory.

Storing a memory phone number/name ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

-

The receiver is on the hook. You wish to store the displayed phone number/name.

MAIER

03098765432

!

!

Press the "set" key. The phone number/name is stored in the memory.

"set": return to the standard display

Function menu

No.-> Memory

Displaying and dialling a memory phone number ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

/

Press the "memory" key . The stored external phone number, if applicable with the name, is displayed.

MAIER

03098765432

/

or

&

With the „memory“ key or with „next“ you choose from one of the last 5 external numbers.

+

A

Lift the receiver. The phone number is dialled automatically.

Conduct the call

Calling

03098765432

Using a memory phone number/name

(example - programming destination dialling) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!/

Press "set" and destination key private .

/

Press the "memory" key.

The stored phone number is accepted. Any existing destination phone number is overwritten.

Enter number

-

Enter number

03098765432

$

/

!

Press "enter" to confirm.

Enter the name or, if applicable, press the

"memory" key . The name is accepted.

"set": End programming

Enter name

MAIER

2 - 53

2


Network code - Call by Call

With a function key "Call by Call" you could select the desired network provider for a long distance call by pressing a key (e.g.

Mobilcom 01019).

Then you dial the code number and the subscriber number.

You can use destination dialing or redial last number for post dialing.

In the dialing preparation you can also use the "Call by Call" key in connection with a phone number from the phone book, the memory or the call list.

First you have to set up a “Call by Call“ function key on your telephone (see

‘Function key assignment’, set 31)

Take the network provider that you want to dial with the "Call by Call" key from the

Least Cost Router (LCR) and store it under the "Call by Call" key.

Storing the network provider for the ‘Call by Call’ key ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!%

Activate the function with ‘set’. Press the desired key "Call by Call". (For the second level: first the ‘Shift’ key then the function key).

Call by Call enter next esc

$

An entered network provider is displayed.

Arcor

01070

&

With ‘next’ you can select another network provider from the LCR.

MOBILCOM

01019

!

‘set’: confirm selection and end entry.

Dialing with the "Call by Call" key ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

+%

Lift the handset and press the "Call by Call" key. The stored network code is displayed and dialed.

MOBILCOM

01019

"

Post dial the code and phone number of the subscriber or post dial with the redial last number function or a destination key.

The outside line is seized automatically.

Telephone as usual when the subscriber answers.

MOBILCOM

0521987650

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

The network code (e.g. 01019) dialed with the "Call by Call" key is stored in the redial last number memory.

2 - 54


2

Parking an external call

You can briefly interrupt an external call and park it in the telephone system because, for example,

- you have to leave your place briefly,

- you wish to resume the call at a different telephone in the telephone system.

The outside line (B channel) remains seized while a call is parked in the telephone system. The external subscriber hears the music on hold.

Every internal user may fetch back (unpark) the parked external call.

You receive a callback if the parked external call is not resumed within four minutes.

Parking an external call ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A

You are conducting an external telephone conversation. You wish to park this call.

98765432

-- -- -- -- --

$

Press the "enter" key to park the call.

98765432

Call parked

-

Replace the receiver. The call is parked. An x flashes in the display.

x- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

Resuming the external call (unparking) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

+

Lift the receiver.

x- 13/--

Please dial

$

Press the "enter" key to resume the call e.g.

on telephone 13

98765432

-- -- -- -- --

A

You can conduct the telephone conversation in the usual fashion.

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You can resume (unpark) the parked call at any telephone. On an a/b telephone, dial the code

*22

to unpark the call.


If several calls are parked in the telephone system, priority is assigned to unparking the first call.

Parking (replug on the bus) in the ISDN exchange (only at the multipoint connection) is possible by the system phone using key sequences (see operation - analog

/ ISDN terminals „Parking an external call“).

2 - 55

2


Room monitoring

You can use any analog telephone (system or standard telephone) in the telephone system to acoustically monitor the room in which it is located, for example to monitor a baby.

You call the guarding telephone from another internal or external telephone and you listen into the room. On a system telephone, the microphone switches on automatically.

You must prepare room monitoring on the telephone intended for this purpose. You can choose whether or not a tone is to sound when room monitoring is activated.

Please refer to the operating instructions for analog terminals entitled "Room monitoring" for details of room monitoring from an external telephone.

Preparing room monitoring ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!10

Enter "set 10" to set up room monitoring.


Room monitoring on: 1 off:>0<

"

"1": Room monitoring on (prepared)

"0": Room monitoring off

Example: "1" - room monitoring prepared

Room monitoring on:>1< off: 0

$

Audible warning on:>1< off: 0

"

Press "enter" to confirm.

Select whether or not a tone is to sound before room monitoring.

"1": Audible warning on

"0": Audible warning off

Example: "0" - Audible warning off

Audible warning on: 1 off:>0<

!

The green LED flashes when room monitoring is active.


Room monitoring by an internal user ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

+

Lift receiver

-- 11/__

Please dial

%"

Telephone 13

13 -- -- -- --

®

Call up the guarding telephone, e.g.

telephone 13

Press the internal key (automatic seizure variant) and dial the internal phone number.

Listen into the room.

When monitoring, pay attention to the fact that you can also be heard in the monitored room.

2 - 56


2

Relay switching


R3, R4)

You can make diverse use of the potentialfree relay contacts instead of the door hands free unit. For example, you can use them to activate an additional bell or an additional door opener.

By programming, you define for each relay a internal phone number and whether it is to operate as a pulse relay (3 seconds on) or as an On / Off relay.

You can activate or deactivate the relays from any internal or external telephone.

From an external location, to do this you dial up the telephone system’s switching box via a direct dialling in or multiple subscriber number. After entry of a code ("as-delivered" settings: no entry), you can switch the relays by entering code digits.

To be noted when switching the relays:

If a port is programmed to connect an audio module, relay R4 is automatically assigned to the audio module.


Relay on/off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

%

Press the "relay" key to turn a relay on off.

Relay 25 on: 1 off:>0<

&

Select a relay with "next"

Relay 26 on: 1 off:>0

"

Relay R26 on:>1< off: 0

(

"1": Selected relay on

"0": Selected relay off

Example: Relay 26, "1" on

Return to the standard display by pressing the "esc".

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

Relay on/off with a special function key ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

%

Turn the relay on or off with the "relay" key .

If the relay is a pulse relay, the second line of the display remains unchanged.

Relay 25 on

(

The displayed message appears on its own after some time or return to the standard display by pressing

"esc".

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

2 - 57

2


Inquiry

While you are conducting a telephone conversation, you can interrupt your conversation and you can talk to somebody else in the meantime. The first conversation is placed on hold by the telecommunications system. The waiting person cannot listen in.

An external subscriber may hear music on hold. You can use all functions of your telephone, e.g. phonebook, speed dialing or voice message, in an inquiry.

Telephone inquiry ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A

You are conducting an external or internal telephone conversation.

Example: External

0301234567

-- -- -- -- --

%"

%"

A

(

%

Internal inquiry

Press the internal key and dial the internal telephone number, e.g. 13.

External inquiry

Press the "brokering" key and dial an external telephone number.

You are conducting a telephone conversation with the internal user. The waiting party cannot listen in.

To return to the waiting party:

If you press "esc", the inquiry call is cleared or if you press the "brokering" key , the inquiry call is placed on hold.

Calling 13

Calling

9876543

9876543

03012345678

03012345678

-- -- -- -- --

03012345678

9876543

Inquiry in the room (muting) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You can interrupt your telephone conversation and you can talk to someone else in the room in the meantime without the other party being able to listen in.

A r

(

You are conducting an external or internal telephone conversation. Example: External

Press the "inquiry key" or the "internal key" . The connection is placed on hold. You can talk without the other party being able to listen in.

Press "esc" or the "inquiry key" to continue the telephone conversation.

0301234567

-- -- -- -- --

Inquiry

Please dial

0301234567

-- -- -- -- --

2 - 58


2

Callback on busy

If an external subscriber is busy, you can initiate an automatic callback from this subscriber. This must be an ISDN subscriber or a subscriber on a digital exchange.

Your telephone rings as soon as your desired call partner picks up the receiver. You receive the callback. Pick up the receiver to automatically call the other party.

Initiating a callback ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A

Call the external subscriber, busy tone, the other party is busy.

User busy

CCBS?

$

Press the "enter" key to initiate the callback

CCBS

On


-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

Callback ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A

Your telephone rings as soon as the other party is free again. The display shows the

052198765432

CCBS callback.

+

Lift the receiver. The other party is automatically rung again.

Calling

CCBS

A

The other party answers. You conduct the telephone conversation in the usual fashion.

If the external subscriber does not answer, if applicable, you enter yourself in the external subscriber’s call list by replacing the receiver.

052198765432

-- -- -- -- --

-


-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A callback is not possible from your required call partner if you hear the error tone:

- the other party is not an ISDN subscriber or is not connected to a digital exchange,

- the "callback on busy" feature is not available in the exchange.

If you should not be obtainable after initiating a callback, the callback is cancelled after 20 seconds and is cleared. If necessary, initiate the callback again.

A callback is cleared if it has not come into being or if it has not come into being within

45 minutes of its initiation.

2 - 59

2


Successively viewing status messages

It may happen that several functions are active simultaneously. These are indicated by flashing of the red LED or by a message on your display, e.g. the call list and an appointment call.

You can display these messages successively.

The order is fixed.

Scrolling through display messages ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

-

The receiver is on the hook. On the display, you see the

!

symbol, indicating that a message is available. The red LED flashes.

-- 11!52

-- -- -- -- --

¡ ¶

&

The date is displayed.

&

&

There is at least one entry in the call list.

-- 11!52

5. July 1998

¡ ¶

List of calls read enter

¡ ¶

Appointment call

To see whether there are any further messages, press the "next" key. You see the next message, if available.

¡ ¶

&

Continue scrolling by pressing "next".

Example: Diversion

Diversion read enter

$

11 permanent to

0123456789

&

$

(

Continue scrolling by pressing "next".

Example: ISDN call forwarding

Read out with "enter". Internal phone number 11 is diverted permanently to external phone number 0123456789

Read out with "enter". ISDN call forwarding on (active) for the external phone number with the name "AGFEO 1" to external phone number 0234567890

Back to standard display:

Automatically – after approx. 20 seconds

Immediately – with "esc"

ISDN call forw.

read enter on AGFEO 1

0234567890

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

By pressing

&

, you can successively view available displays. If applicable, you can press

$

to read out the phone number to which the setting applies.

If you are called in the process, the caller is displayed and you can conduct the telephone conversation in the usual fashion.

2 - 60


2

Entering user names

You can enter a name for your telephone.

Your name then appears in the display of your system telephone when you receive an internal call, e.g.: from MILLER for SMITH or, vice versa, your name appears in the display of the internal user that you call, e.g.

from SMITH for MILLER

Entering user names ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!32

Initiate the function

Enter name 11

_

1&2

$

Enter the name with the digit keys, e.g. AD

(see notes)

Confirm the name by pressing "enter"

Enter name 11

AD

Change

User name

!


Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Enter a name on the digital keypad:

&

Y&

?

If necessary, press several times

Example: 1 = A

11 = B

111 = C

1111 = 1

To the next input field or automatically after a time out

To the previous input field; character can be overwritten

Delete the flashing character

ABC

1

JKL

4

STU

7

º

DEF

2

MNO

5

VWX

8

. / _

0

GHI

3

PQR

6

YZ-

9

‘

Y?

Y

Clear the entire entry

By pressing

Y you change between small and capital letters. The display shows

ABC

or abc

.

2 - 61

2


Storing phonebook numbers

You can centrally store up 200 important external phone numbers and affiliated names in the telephone system.

These telephone numbers can then be selected from every system telephone by pressing the "phonebook" key, either via a numeric or an alphabetical register. You can switch over the registers by pressing the

"shift" key

Y

.

As well as normal phone numbers you can phonebook using the

S

and

R

keys. This and

R

keys.

The destinations "

*

" and "

#

" are reserved for emergency phone numbers. However, they are entered in the same way as the other phone numbers in the phonebook.

If an external caller’s phone number is communicated to you, it is compared against the entries in the phonebook and, if they agree, the caller’s name is displayed instead of the phone number.

Programming a phonebook number ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!t

Press the "set" and "phonebook" keys to initiate the function or go directly to input by entering "set 51".

Phonebook

Add entry

$

Confirm; the first free memory is displayed.

PB 010 Number

_

"

$

Enter the external phone number that you wish to store.

Confirm

PB 010 Number

0304050

PB 010 Name

_

1&2

$

Enter the name, e.g. AD

(1 = A, next, 2 = D; see notes under "Entering user names")

Confirm

PB 010 Name

AD

Phonebook

Add entry

!

"enter": store a further phone number or


Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Enter an external phone number with "0" for seizure of an outside line. The outside line is seized automatically during dialling.

When dialling from the phonebook, you can post-dial numbers within 20 seconds.

All users can dial the phone numbers from the phonebook, regardless of their outside line privileges.

A user can dial the emergency phone numbers and the direct number (baby phone number) even after reaching the defined units limit.

2 - 62


2

Phonebook - changing a number ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!t

Press "set" and the "phonebook" key to initiate the function or go direct to input by entering "set 52".

Phonebook

Add entry

&

Select the program item by pressing "next"

Phonebook

Change entry

$

Confirm the selection

005

$

Enter the three digits for which the phone number is stored as an abbreviated dialling number (between 000 and 199), e.g. 005

Confirm

Enter short no.

000 ... 199 # *

ANTON

0304050

?

"

Clear individual digits of the phone number by pressing "clear" or clear all of it by pressing the "shift key" and "clear".

Change the number

PB 005 Number

0304050_

PB 05 Number

030405_

$

$

Confirm

Confirm or clear and modify the displayed name

PB 005 Number

0304055

PB 005 Name

ANTON_

Phonebook

Change entry

!

"enter": Change a further destination in the phonebook or

"set": End programming

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

If " no entry

" is displayed after entry of an abbreviated dialling number, you can scroll back in the phonebook from the abbreviated dialling number 199 by pressing the

* key. By pressing the

#

key, you can scroll down (" next

"), beginning with the abbreviated dialling number 000.

2 - 63

2


Phonebook - clearing a number ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!t

Press "set" and the "phonebook" key to initiate the function or go directly to input by entering "set 53".

Phonebook

Add entry

&&

Select the program item with "next"

Phonebook

Clear entry

$ Confirm the selection

Enter short No.

000 ... 199 # *

005

$

$

!

Enter the three-digit abbreviated dialling number that you wish to clear (between 000 and 199), e.g. 005

Confirm the entered abbreviated dialling number.

Confirm clearing by pressing "enter" or cancel the operation be pressing "esc".

"enter": Clear a further abbreviated dialling destination or "set": End clearing

ANTON

0304055

Clear No. 005 ?

enter esc

Phonebook

Clear entry

Entering an emergency number ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!t

Press "set" and the "phonebook" key to initiate the function or go directly to input with "set 54"

Phonebook

Add entry

&&&


Enter

Emergency number


Select emergency

* or #

* Select the emergency call, e.g.

*

" Enter the emergency phone number

Enter number

-

Enter number

98765

!

"enter": Enter the emergency phone number

#

or "set": End input

2 - 64


2

Entering a direct number ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!t

Press "set" and the "phonebook" key to initiate the function or go directly to input by entering "set 55"

Phonebook

Add entry

&&

....


Enter

Baby call


Enter number

_

"

!

Enter the direct phone number you wish to store

"set": End input

Enter number

012346789545

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

To clear an input, clear individual characters by pressing

?

or clear everything by pressing

Y?

.

You activate the emergency and/or direct phone number (baby call number) with the

"lock" key or "set 13".

2 - 65

2


Phonebook - dialling numbers

The alphabetically or numerically sorted registers of the phonebook are at your disposal for selecting phone numbers.

You can switch from one register to the other by pressing the "shift" key

Y

.

Phonebook (numeric) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

-


+ t

"

#

or

=

Initiate abbreviated dialling by pressing the

"phonebook" key . You are in the numeric register.

Enter the abbreviate dialling number. The phone number is displayed or with the

# key, you can scroll through the stored entries in sequence from 000 to 199 until you have found the required name

(scroll back with the

*

key).

Lift the receiver or press the "loudspeaker" key. An outside line is seized automatically and the displayed phone number is dialled automatically.

Enter short No.

000 ... 199 # *

ANTON

052123456

BERTA

022135745

BERTA

022135745

Phonebook (alphabetical) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

-


t

Enter short No.

000 ... 199 # *

Y

"

&


"phonebook" key . You are in the numeric register.

You switch over the alphabetic register by pressing the "shift" key.

Enter the required initial letter, A = 1. The first entry with the selected initial letter is displayed.

Press the "next" key to move to input of the second letter. The input cursor flashes.

Select letter

A ... Z

ABBA

012345678

Select letter

A-

2 - 66


2

+

" or

=

Enter the second letter, e.g. N = 55. You can scroll down by pressing

#

and you can scroll up by pressing

*

.


ANTON

052123456

ANTON

052123456

Redialling a phonebook entry ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

-


t


"phonebook" key . You are in the register that you used last (numeric or alphabetical).

Enter short No.

000 ... 199 # *

Y

If necessary, press the "shift" key to switch to the other register.

Select letter

A ... Z

:

Press the "redial" key. The entry that was last only displayed or also dialled in this register is displayed again.

ANTON

052123456

+ or

=


ANTON

052123456

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

All users can dial the phone numbers from the phonebook regardless of their defined outside line privileges.

name, you can only retrieve the phone number via the numerically sorted register.

If the telephone system’s barred range is programmed for your telephone, you cannot dial the phonebook numbers that are within the barred range. You hear the error tone.

You can also select abbreviated dialling numbers after having already lifted the receiver, e.g. during an inquiry. In this case, you must additionally confirm selection of the required phone number by pressing the

"enter" key.

The phonebook entries always appear in the sort order that was active last (numeric or alphabetical). If a phone number has been entered in the phonebook without a

You can add incomplete numbers: select the abbreviate dialling number, lift the receiver or press the "loudspeaker" key and then dial the additional digits.

2 - 67

2


Telephone lock - emergency/direct (baby call)

You can protect your telephone against unauthorised use by locking it.

If your telephone is locked, you can:

- now only call internal users

- accept all incoming calls and, if necessary, forward them internally

- externally only dial the stored direct phone number (baby number), the emergency call numbers and the stored automatic dialling number. You must activate automatic dialling before locking the telephone.

If you have programmed a telephone code for your telephone, you must enter your four-digit code number to unlock it.

Locking your telephone ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

-%


"Telephone lock" key . The telephone is locked. The display shows "telephone lock".

If somebody attempts to dial an outside number, that person hears an error tone.

Telephone lock

Unlocking your telephone ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

-%


"Telephone lock" key . The telephone is unlocked. You can now use your telephone again in the manner to which you are accustomed.

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

"

If the telephone code is prompted in the display: enter the code.

Locking your telephone without a function key ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!13

Initiate the function by entering "set 13".

The current setting is marked in the display

Lock telephone on: 1 off:>0<

"

"1": Lock the telephone

!

Lock telephone on:>1< off: 0

Telephone lock

Press the "set" key.

This ends the operation. Your telephone is locked.

The display shows "

Telephone lock

" or, if an emergency/baby phone number has been stored, it shows "

Emergency/baby

". If anyone attempts to make an outside call, that person hears an error tone.

2 - 68


2

Unlocking your telephone without a function key ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!13

Initiate the function by entering the "set 13".

The current setting is marked in the display.

Lock telephone on:>1< off: 0

"

"0": Unlock the telephone

Lock telephone on: 1 off:>0<

"

!

If the telephone code is prompted in the display: enter the code.

Press the "set" key (not applicable if you have entered the code). This ends the operation. You can now use your telephone in the manner to which you are accustomed.

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

Emergency call ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

-

The telephone is locked and the receiver is on the hook.

Emergency/baby

* or #

"

Emergency call memory

* or #

. Example:

"

*

". The phone number is displayed.

Emergency call 1

123

+

=

Lift the receiver. The phone number is dialled automatically or press the "loudspeaker" key. You are in the hands-free mode and a phone number is dialled automatically.

You can now speak.

Emergency call

123

Direct call (baby call) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

+

The telephone is locked. Lift the receiver.

Emergency/baby

* or #

&

When any key is pressed, the phone number stored as the direct number is dialled. You can now speak.

Baby call

45678

2 - 69

2


Appointment call - non-recurring appointment

You can have your telephone remind you of an appointment. When it is time for the defined appointment (date, time), an appointment call rings on your telephone.

You can turn this function on or off at any time. You are even reminded of an active appointment when you have activated "do not disturb".

Storing an appointment call ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!%

Press the "set" key and the "appointment" key or, when not using a function key, press

"set 15" to initiate appointment input.

Appointment time

__:__

"$

Enter the time with four digits, e.g. 1315, and press the "enter" key. Clear any previous entry if necessary by pressing "clear".

Enter date

__.__.__

"

Enter the date with six digits. Example:

210798

Enter date

21.07.98

!

Press the "set" key to store the entered data and to automatically activate the appointment call. To enable a check, the clock symbol appears in the display.

-- "11:52

-- -- -- -- --

Appointment call off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

%

Press the "appointment" key . The stored appointment appears in the top line of the display. The appointment call is off.

13:15 21.07.98

Appointment off

(

Press the "esc" key to show the standard display. The clock symbol has disappeared from the display.

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

Appointment call on ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

%

Press the "appointment" key . The stored appointment appears in the top line of the display. The appointment call is on.

13:15 21.07.98

Appointment on

(

Press the "esc" key to show the standard display. To enable a check, the display shows the clock symbol.

-- "11:52

-- -- -- -- --

2 - 70


2

Appointment call display off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

The appointment call rings at the defined time. Your display shows the "appointment call" message. The clock symbol in the display is off. The red LED flashes.

Appointment call

¡ ¶

(

To turn off the display message and flashing of the LED: press the "esc" key.

-- 13:15

-- -- -- -- --

¡ ¡

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You are only reminded of an appointment if you have activated one. If you temporarily do not wish to receive an appointment call, for example, simply turn off the appointment.

If you are currently conducting a telephone conversation at the time of the appointment call, you will not receive the appointment call and the display message until you have replaced the receiver.

You can only alternately turn a stored appointment on or off with the "appointment" function key.

The appointment call is only signalled on your telephone, even if you have set

"diversion to".

2 - 71

2


Activating/deactivating timers

The telecommunications system provides 10 timers. You can use them to program the system to activate or deactivate functions at specific times and on specific days.

The following functions can be controlled by timer:

- Call variants (night service, day time

service)

- Internal call forwarding

- Busy on Busy

- External call privileges

- Telephone lock

- Second Call Busy

- Relays

- Diversions

You can assign a function to any timer.

The timers can only be programmed in the

”TK-Set” program.

You can activate or deactivate timer control from any telephone (such as for long weekends or holiday times). When a timer is switched off the ”off” defaults of the functions are automatically active.

You can also switch the ”on/off” defaults for the functions from any telephone (such as to set an earlier or later close of business).

You can combine several timers in a group and control them collectively.

Activating/deactivating timers ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

/

Press the

”Timer” key

to control the programmed timer in the system.

Timer 0 next on:>1< off: 0

"

”1”: The timer is active. The function(s) is/are switched at the pre-set time.

”0”: Deactivate timer. The function(s) immediately return to their ”off” defaults.

&

"

Press ”next” to control the functions.

”1”: Functions are set to their ”on” defaults and the timer is active.

”0”: Functions are set to their ”off” defaults.

Timer 0 Fct on:>1< off: 0

!


2 - 72

Switching over the door call variant


2

AS 190 plus, AS 191 plus - When an door call arrives, one telephone or several telephones ring(s) simultaneously. The called internal user who lifts the receiver first is connected to the caller. Which telephones are to ring is defined by programming in the ringing distribution configuration.

Different ringing distribution settings are possible for the daytime and night-time thanks to door call variants (door call variants 1 and 2).

You can activate/deactivate door call variant

2 (night service) separately for each external phone number in your telephone system, and from every internal or external telephone. Please refer to the operating instructions for analog terminals -

"Switching over the door call variant" - for details of how to switch over the door call variant from an external telephone.

When door call variant 2 is deactivated, door call variant 1 (daytime service) is on.

Door call variant 2 on/off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!%

Enter "set" and press the "call variant 2"

(night) key or enter "set 11" to activate door call variant 2 (night service).

Call variant 2 next/Externalno.

&

Press "next" to select the door phone number, e.g. 30

Door 30 on: 1 off:>0<

"

"1": Call variant 2 on

"0": Call variant 2 off

Example: "1" - on

Door 30 on:>1< off: 0

!

"set" : end programming

The door call variant 2 is on.

The display shows the "

!

" symbol.

-- 11!52

-- -- -- -- --

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

The "!" symbol may stand for several settings in your telephone system. If necessary, you can display the settings by pressing

&

several times.

Press

$

to indicate the external phone number to which the setting applies.

You can deactivate (switch off) the displayed setting with clear.

If the selection ‘ext. all’ is set up when call variant 2 is switched on/off, door call variant


2 - 73

2


Diverting a door call to an external subscriber

AS 190 plus, AS 191 plus - If you wish a visitor to reach you even when you are out of the house, you can divert a door call to an external phone number, e.g. a radio telephone. Despite door call diversion, the internal user also hears the ringing. The door call can still be accepted internally.

If you divert to an ISDN terminal that is capable of displaying a caller’s phone number, you can see that the call is a diverted door call and you can answer accordingly.

You can also activate or deactivate a programmed door call diversion from any external telephone. Refer to the section of the operating instructions for analog terminals entitled "Diverting a door call to an external subscriber" for details of how to do this.

Programming and switching door call diversion ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!%

Initiate the function by pressing "set" and the "diversion to" key or "set 17".

Diversion to

Sourcenumber __

"

Enter phone number of the door (source number) from which you want to divert calls to an external subscriber, e.g. 20

Diversion 30 to internal ?

&

Press "enter" to confirm

Diversion 30 to external ?

$

Enter phone number of the door (source number) from which you want to divert calls to an external subscriber, e.g. 20

Diversion 30

_

"

With ‘next’ to selection – diversion to external subscriber

Diversion 30

98765432

$

Press "enter" to confirm. Define the diversion mode

Diversion 30 p:>1< b: 2 n: 3

"

"1":

P

ermanent diversion (Türruf kann nur ständig umgeleitet werden)

Diversion 30 p:>1< b: 2 n: 3

$


Diversion 30 on: 1 off:>0<

"

"1": Diversion on

"0": Diversion off. Example "1"

Diversion 30 on:>1< off: 0

!

"set": end input

-- 11!52

-- -- -- -- --

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

The external subscriber is called for 30 seconds, after which ringing is cancelled.

2 - 74

The electric door opener cannot be actuated out of the diverted door call.


2

Actuating an intercom system and door opener

AS 190 plus, AS 191 plus - If you have connected a door hands-free unit (TFE) to your telephone system, you can speak to a visitor who is standing at your door.

Your telephone rings with the door call when the visitor presses the bell push. After the last ring, you have 30 seconds time (for as long as the red LED is flashing) to accept the door call by lifting the receiver. During this time, your telephone is busy for all other calls. If another telephone rings with the door call, you can pick up the door call on your telephone.

During a door conversation, you can actuate the electrical door opener from your telephone.

Actuating the door intercom and door opener ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

-

The receiver is on the hook. You hear the door ringing tone on your telephone. The red

LED flashes.

Doorbell

-- -- -- -- --

¡ ¶

+

Lift the receiver. You are connected to the door intercom and you can talk to the visitor.

Door loudspeaker

%

To open the door: press the "door" key. The door opener is activated for three seconds. To enable a check, this is displayed and you hear the acknowledgement tone.

¡ ¡

Door opener on

¡ ¡

Calling the door station/picking up a door call ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

+

Lift the receiver

-- 11:52

Please dial

%

Door loudspeaker

-

Press the "door" key. The acknowledgement tone sounds. You are connected to the door intercom and you can speak with the visitor.


This ends the operation.

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You cannot call the door station if you have not configured a "door" function key on your system telephone.

You can only pick up a door call on your system telephone by pressing the "door" function key.

You must have configured a "door" function key to open the door. If necessary, repeat opening the door by pressing the "door" key again.

To prematurely cancel door opening: press the "esc" key.

2 - 75

2


Communication your phone number

The telephone system communicates your phone number to an external ISDN subscriber even before the call is connected ("asdelivered" settings).

In ISDN, two variants of communication are at your disposal:

Communication of the caller’s phone number to the called party

Your phone number is communicated to the external ISDN subscriber that you call.

Communication of the called party’s to the caller

Your phone number is communicated to the external ISDN subscriber who calls you.

You request communication of these numbers when ordering your ISDN connection. If you wish to be able to turn phone number communication on/off in individual cases, you must additionally order this.

Communication of your phone number to the called party on/off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!82

Enter "set 82" to set up communication of your phone number to the called party.


No. -> Called on:>1< off: 0

"

!

"1": The phone number is communicated

"0": The phone number is not communicated.

Example: "0".


No. -> Called on: 1 off:>0<

Communication of your phone number with a function key on/off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

/

Press the „incognito“ key to activate or deactivate the communication of your phone number. Example: communication activate.

No. -> Caller on

Communication of your phone number to callers on/off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!83

Enter "set 83" to set up communication of your phone number to the caller. The current setting is marked.

No. -> Caller on:>1< off: 0

"

!

"1": The phone number is communicated

"0": The phone number is not communicated

Example: "0".


No. -> Caller on: 1 off:>0<

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

On a point-to-point connection , your local code, your system number and your direct dialling in number are communicated

(e.g. 030 987654 12).

On a point-to-multipoint connection , your local code and your multiple subscriber number (MSN) (e.g. 030 87654323) that has been assigned to you by programming are communicated.

To separate charges, you can specifically send a different MSN when dialling an external number. To seize an outside line, press the corresponding MSN/External key.

2 - 76


2

Diversion from - diverting calls of other telephones

You can divert all calls from other telephones which may not be manned individually to your own telephone. The transferred telephone doesn´t ring after that!

You may make telephone calls as usual on an transferred telphone. When you lift the receiver on your telephone, the special dial tone reminds you that diversion from (follow me) is on. A "!" is displayed additionally on both, yours and the transferred the system phone.

Status request with

&&

...

$

.

Diversion from – programming and switching ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!%

Activate the function with "set" and "Diversion from" key or "set 18".

Diversion from

Sourcenumber __

"

Enter phone number (source number) whose calls are to be diverted to your phone, e.g. 13.

Diversion 13/__ on: 1 off:>0<

"

"1": Diversion on


Diversion 13/__ on:>1< off: 0

!

"set": end input.

Every call for telephone 13 now rings on your phone.

-- 11!52

-- -- -- -- --

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You can switch a "Diversion from" which has already been programmed on and off on your system telephone with the "Diversion from" key and "enter". The display shows:

Calls can only be diverted once. Calls diverted to your are signaled on your telephone even if you have switched on a

‘Diversion to’ on your telephone. A "Diversion from" a protected telephone to your telephone is possible.

13 permanent to

Telephone 11

$

13 deactivated t

Telephone 11

You cannot divert calls back, wake up and appointment calls.

Status messages:

The "!" symbol may stand for several settings in your telephone system. If necessary, you can display the settings by pressing & several times.

After enter you can display all diversions concerning your internal phone number one after another with next. You can deactivate

(switch off) the respective displayed diversion with clear.

2 - 77

2


Diversion to - diverting calls to another telephone

Diversions through the telephone system

You can divert all calls for any telephone whatever (source) to another internal user or via the second B channel to an external subscriber.

When diverting you can choose whether

- calls are to be diverted permanently to the external subscriber,

- a call is only to be diverted if your telephone is busy,

- a call is only to be diverted if it is not accepted (within 15 seconds).

You can also set up diversion to an external subscriber from an external telephone connection. Refer to the section of the operating instructions for analog telephones entitled "Diversion to another telephone" for details of how to do this.

Despite diversion, you can still make telephone calls from your telephone. When you lift the receiver on your telephone, the special dial tone reminds you that diversion from (follow me) is on. An "!" is displayed additionally on the diverted system telephone. Status request with

&&

...

$

.

Programming and switching diversion to ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!%

Initiate the function by pressing "set" and the

"diversion to" key or "set 17".

Diversion to

Sourcenumber __

"

Enter the phone number of the telephone (source number) whose calls you want to divert to another internal or external subscriber, e.g. 11.

Diversion 11/__ to internal ?

&

$

"

$

"

$

With ‘next’ possibly to selection – diversion to external subscriber

Confirm selection with ‘enter’

Example: Diverting to an external subscriber

Enter the external phone number to which you wish to divert calls.

Press "enter" to confirm. Define the diversion mode

"1":

P

ermanent diversion Example: 2

"2": Diversion on

b

usy

"3": Diversion if

n

o answer (after 15 seconds)


Diversion 11/__ to external ?

Diversion 11/__

_

Diversion 11/__

98765432

Diversion 11/__ p:>1 b: 2 n: 3

Diversion 11/__ p: 1 b:>2<n: 3

Diversion 11/__ on: 1 off:>0<

"

!

"1": Diversion on


"set": end input. The ! symbol stands for active call diversion.

Diversion 11/__ on:>1< off: 0

-- 11!52

-- -- -- -- --

2 - 78


2

Diversion to – switching with function key ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

%

Activate function with the "Diversion to" key. The current diversion status is displayed.

11 busy to

98765432

$

&

(

Deactivate or activate the diversion as you wish with ‘enter’.

With "next" possibly activate or deactivate diversion of the 2 nd internal phone number.

Return to initial menu with "esc".

11 deactivated t

98765432

12 permanent to

Telefon 21

-- 11!52

-- -- -- -- --

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You cannot activate "diversion to an internal user"

- if you have previously set up "diversion from" on your telephone,

- if calls for your required diversion destination are already being diverted.

must be the only one who is called and this user must be entitled to dial the external phone number.

Diversions to a telephone that is set to do not disturb are not possible.

You cannot divert calls back, wake up and appointment calls.

For diversion to an external destination, an outside line must be free, the diverting user

Status messages:

The "!" symbol may stand for several settings in your telephone system. If necessary, you can display the settings by pressing

&

several times.

After pressing enter, you can display all diversions concerning your internal phone number one after the other with next. You can deactivate (switch off) the respective displayed diversion with clear.

2 - 79

2


Diversions through the ISDN exchange:

you can only use the "call forwarding" feature after specially requesting it from your telephone company.

When you forward the calls of a point-topoint connection, you always forward the entire connection.

When using a point-to-multipoint connection, you can divert each single multiple subscriber number (MSN) to another destination. Using a "call forwarding" key, you can activate call forwarding to one single external phone number or you can successively activate call forwarding for several external phone numbers. You decide what to define when programming the call forwarding destinations.

You can also set ISDN call forwarding from an external telephone connection. Refer to the section of the operating instructions for analog terminals entitled "Diverting to..." for details of how to do this. You must have programmed a destination before activating call forwarding.

There are the following call forwarding variants:

- Permanent call forwarding - All calls are forwarded immediately.

- Call forwarding on busy - All calls are forwarded immediately if your connection is busy.

- Call forwarding if no answer - All calls are forwarded after 15 seconds if nobody answers.

Programming a call forwarding destination ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!%

By pressing "set" and the "ISDN call forwarding" key or "set 81", initiate programming of the call forwarding destination.

ISDN call forw.

next/position

&

By pressing "next", select a position that has no entry for programming ISDN call forwarding.

No entry next/position 1

$

Press "enter" to confirm. The first external phone number of your telephone or the name assigned to an external phone number is displayed.

External number ext.23456781

&

$

Press "next" to select an external phone number/name for which you wish to program

ISDN call forwarding.

Press "enter" to confirm the selection

External number ext.AGFEO

"

$

Enter the phone number of the diversion destination without "0" for outside line seizure


Enter number

-

Enter number

98765432 ext.AGFEO

p:>1<b: 2 n: 3

2 - 80


2

"

!

Select the call forwarding variant,

p

ermanent

= 1, on

b

usy = 2, if

n

o answer = 3 (after 15 seconds) e.g. "2".

"enter": program further call forwarding settings or

"set": end programming. You can activate call forwarding with the "ISDN call forwarding".

ext.AGFEO

p: 1 b:>2<n: 3

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

Call forwarding on/off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

%

Press the "ISDN call forwarding" key . The display shows which external phone number of your telephone system has been assigned activated ( on

) or deactivated ( off

) call forwarding to which phone number.

on 23456781

87654321

&

By pressing "next", the next programmed

ISDN call forwarding setting, if applicable, is displayed.

In the example, the external phone number with the name

AGFEO is not forwarded

( off

). You can activate forwarding.

off AGFEO

98765432

$

By pressing "enter", you activate the displayed call forwarding.

Activation sent

(

You deactivate any activated call forwarding in the same way. Wait for the corresponding display (acknowledgement from the ISDN exchange). It appears after a delay of up to

60 seconds.

Return to the standard display by pressing

"esc". The display shows the "

!

" symbol if

ISDN call forwarding is activated.

Deactivation sent

-- 11!52

-- -- -- -- --

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You can only activate and deactivate call forwarding with an "ISDN call forwarding" function key.

already forwarded. If applicable, deactivate call forwarding.

You can only program a call forwarding destination if the affected connection is not

You can make outgoing external calls despite call forwarding. You hear the special dial tone of the ISDN exchange.

2 - 81

2


Displaying and deleting connection costs

You can display the total counters and delete for the connection costs individually and delete them singly. When you delete a total counter, you also delete the single counter of the user. The single counter registers the costs for the last call.

Resetting connection costs to zero (delete) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!72

Note the display: If the costs code is requested after pressing 72, you must enter the code in 4 digits.

Costs of U11

12,12DM

"

&

?

Enter the internal phone number directly, e.g.

23, or

Scroll to the display of the connection costs of the desired user with "next"

Delete the displayed connection costs

Costs of U23

9,72DM

Costs of U23

9,72DM

Costs of U23 deleted

&

!

Scroll with "next" if necessary to clear other connection costs, e.g. costs which were recorded under one of your external phone numbers costs of the S0 port (connection costs of your whole telephone system) or all costs (all data sets) or

Exit function with "set" ext. 23456782

7,20DM

Costs of S0

223,00DM

All data sets

223,00DM

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

The costs for the door call diversions externally are recorded under the internal phone number of the door (Txx).

2 - 82


2

Printing connection costs

You can print the total connection costs of every user, every MSN, the door call diversions externally and your telephone system singly. Printing is done on the connected serial printer. Depending on the setting printing is with 24 characters per line or 80 characters per line.

The printout of the connection costs contains:

- date, time

- user number, door, MSN or S0 port

- total connection costs in units and amount (if you have entered a tariff units factor).

Printing all totals of the connection costs ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!73

Note the display. If the cost code is requested after pressing 73, you must enter the code in four digits.

Print costs

User MSN S0 next

$

Confirm with "enter" if you want a printout of all total connection costs (of all users, external phone numbers and S0 port).

Print costs printed

!

"set": exit programming

Printing certain total connection costs ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!73

Note the display: If the costs code is requested after pressing 73, you must set the code in 4 digits.

Print costs

User MSN S0 next

&

"

Scroll to the display of a certain user or the S0 port with "next".

Order: all data sets, user, external phone number, total S0 port or

Enter internal phone number, e.g. 13

Print costs

Print? enter

Print costs of

U13 ? enter

$

Costs of U13 are printed

!

Confirm with "enter", print total connection costs

"enter": enter another user or


2 - 83

2


Connection costs - displaying your own costs

On your system telephone, you can query your connection costs if you have ordered the "communication of connection charges during and at the end of a connection" feature from the network carrier.

You can display:

- costs of the existing connection,

- the still available amount if a cost limit is entered

- costs of the last connection

- your total connection costs

Displaying connection costs during a connection ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A

You are conducting an external telephone conversation.

0309876543

-- -- -- -- --

-

-

Cost display on your system telephone is on (set 281), without a cost limit

During an external call, the current costs of the call are displayed for up to 5 seconds in the first display line after every counting pulse. Otherwise, the external phone number is displayed. You can display the current costs of a call for up to 5 seconds at any time by pressing the "units" key .

At the end of the connection, the costs of the last call are displayed for 20 seconds. The time then appears.

If no call costs are communicated, the duration of the call is displayed.

Cost display on your system telephone is on (set 281) with cost limit

During an external conversation, the current cost limit is displayed for up to 5 seconds in the first display line after every counting pulse. Otherwise, the external phone number is displayed. You can display the current cost limit for up to 5 seconds at any time by pressing the "units" key .

At the end of the connection, the remaining amount is displayed for 20 seconds. The time then appears.

0,36DM

-- -- -- -- --

Cost of call

0,48DM

Cost of call

0:00:35 h

Limit DM 011,84

-- -- -- -- --

Cost of call

Limit 011,72DM

2 - 84


2

Connection costs - displaying the last connection/total ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

-%

The receiver is on the hook. Press the "units" key or "set 71". The costs of the last connection are displayed.

Last connection

0,12DM

&

Press the "next" key.

The cost limit has been entered , the remaining amount is displayed.

Cost of T11

Limit 011,72DM

(

Without cost limit - the total current connection costs (DM) are displayed.

"esc" or "set": End the display

Cost of T11

123,28DM

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

No connection costs (DM) are displayed if no tariff units factor is programmed.

For technical reasons, the information on the network carrier’s invoice may deviate from the total of the telephone system’s connection costs. The tariff units counter in the network carrier’s exchange is always binding.

2 - 85

2


Connection costs - Starting and stopping recording for certain users

You can start and also stop the recording of connection costs for certain users specifically. When starting you reset the total connection costs for this user. When stopping the total connection costs are printed on the connected printer and the external call authorization of this user is set to "incoming calls only".

The number of billable connections is added to the printout.

Starting costs recording ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!74

Note the display: If the cost code is requested after pressing 74, you must enter the code in

4 digits.

Start recording

User No. ? next

"

Enter the phone number of the desired user, e.g. 13 or select the next user with "next".

Record ext13 start ? enter

$

!

Confirm with "enter", this user can then telephone with full external call authorization. Enter the next user or


Record ext13 started

Stopping cost recording ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!75

Note the display: If the cost code is requested after pressing 75, the code must be entered in 4 digits.

Stop recording

User no ? next

"

$

!

Enter the phone number of the desired user, e.g. 13 or select the next user with "next".

Confirm with "enter", the total connection costs are printed. The external call authorization of the user is set to "incoming calls only". The full external call authorization is only released when the cost recording for the user has been started.

Enter the next user or


Record ext13 stop ? enter

Record ext13 stopped

2 - 86


2

Redial - dialling a phone number again

In the

extended redial memory

, the telephone system stores the last five external phone numbers that you have dialled. You can select one of these external phone numbers and you can dial by simply lifting the receiver.

With the

automatic redial

feature, your system telephone makes 10 attempts to establish a connection to an external subscriber who is busy or who does not answer. If the external subscriber does not answer, the telephone is rung for 30 seconds. The system telephone then cancels the connection attempt. After every attempt, the system telephone inserts a break of 90 seconds. If the other party answers, you must lift the receiver or press the loudspeaker key as otherwise the connection will be cleared after 10 seconds.

You can dial any external phone number by means of the automatic redial function that is displayed when the receiver is on the hook. This is the case after dialling preparation, after pressing the "redial" key or after the "destination" key or "phonebook".

Extended redial ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

-:

The receiver is on the hook. Press the "redial" key. The phone number dialled last is displayed.

Redial

0306108294

:

By pressing the "redial" key, select one of the last 5 external phone numbers dialled.

Redial

0309876543

+

Lift the receiver. The displayed external phone number is dialled.

Calling

0309876543

Automatic redial ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

-

e.g.

:

While the receiver is on the hook, you press the "redial" key, for example. The phone number dialled last is displayed.

Redial

0306108294

$

Automatic redial begins when you press the

"enter" key. The green LED flashes. On the display, you see how many times the system will still attempt to reach the other party. The loudspeaker is switched on if a connection is established.

Automatic rd. 10

0306108294

¶ ¡

+ or

= If the other party answers: Lift the receiver or press the loudspeaker key as otherwise the connection will be cleared after 10 seconds.

Connect

0306108294

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

An external phone number that you have dialled by means of the "destination dialling" or "phonebook" function is not stored in the redial memory.

You can cancel automatic redial by pressing any key on your system telephone.

2 - 87

2


Wake up call - recurring appointment

You can get your telephone to remind you of a regularly recurring appointment. Every day at the define time, the wake up tone sounds for a maximum of one minute with rising volume.

You can turn this function on or off at any time. The wake up call functions even if you have activated "do not disturb".

Storing a wake up call ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!%

Press the "set" key and the "wake up" key or "set 16" to initiate input of the wake up time.

Wake up time ?

__:__

"$

Enter the time with 4 digits, e.g. 1315, and press the "enter" key.

Clear any previous entry by pressing the shift key and "clear".

Wake up 13:15 on: 1 off:>0<

1!

-- ∑ 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

0!

Press "1" and "set" to store the entered wake up time and to automatically switch on the wake up call. To enable a check, you see a bell in the display.

or

Press "0" and "set" if you do not want to activate the wake up time until later by pressing the "wake up" key . The entered wake up time is stored.

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

Wake up call on ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

%

Press the "wake up" key . The stored wake up time appears in the top display line. The wake up call is on.

13:15

Wake up on

(

Press the "esc" key to show the standard display. To enable a check, you see a bell in the display.

-- ∑ 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

2 - 88


2

Wake up call off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

%

Press the "wake up" key . The stored wake up time appears in the top display line. The wake up call is off.

13:15

Wake up off

(

Press the "esc" key to show the standard display. The bell on the display is off.

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

Wake up call display off ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

The wake up tone sounds at the defined time. Your display shows the

" wake up call

" message.

Wake up call

-- -- -- -- --

(

To turn the display and the wake up call off:

Press the "esc" key.

The next wake up call takes place at the same time on the next day.

-- ∑ 13:15

-- -- -- -- --

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

The wake up call only functions if you have activated it. If you temporarily do not to wish to have a wake up call, for example, simply turn it off by pressing the "wake up" key.

If you are making a telephone call at the time as the wake up call, the wake up tone and the display will not appear until you have replaced the receiver.

When on, a wake up call will wake you up every day at the same time.

The wake up call will be signalled on your telephone even if you have set up "diversion to".

2 - 89

2


Destination dialing - Storing and dialing phone numbers

Your system telephone can have up to 20 destination keys. You can press a destination key to dial a stored phone number (destination dialing)

Under a destination key public you store a phone number from the telephone system’s phone book which you want to use particularly frequently and quickly.

Under a Destination key private you store a private, individual phone number. With every phone number you can store an additional text, e.g. a name. (For how to enter a name, see Notes.)

It may have been defined in the programming which function keys of your system telephone are destination keys. These may be function keys of the first or second level

(see "Changing function key assignment2).

Storing a phone number for destination key public ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!%

Activate the function with "set". Press the desired destination key public.

(For the second level: first the ‘Shift’ key, then the destination key).

Select letter

A ... Z

"

Select the desired phone number from the phone book (see "Phone book - Dialing phone numbers"). Depending on the set register, enter the initial letter or the short dialing number.

ANTON

052123456

$

Confirm selection with "enter".

Destination dialing program

!

"set": end input

Storing a phone number for destination key private ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!%

Activate the function with "set". Press the desired destination key private.

(For the second level: first the "shift" key, then the destination key).

An already stored number will be displayed.

Enter phone no.

_

"

Enter the phone number you wish to store under this destination key.

If there is already a number here: delete with the "clear" key or overwrite the phone number.

Enter phone no.

056432165

$

Confirm with "enter".

Enter name

_

2 - 90


2

1&2

Storing a name

Enter the name. Example: AD (1 = A, "next",

2 =D). If necessary, clear any existing name by pressing the "clear" key.

Then press the "enter" key to confirm.

Enter name

AD

$

$

!

To program further destination keys: Press

"enter" key. Enter further phone numbers.

Press "set" to terminate the operation. The entered phone number is stored specifically for the required destination key.

Program destination dialing

Press destination key

-- 11:52

-- -- -- -- --

Dialling a phone number with a destination key ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

+%

Lift the receiver and press the destination key.

The stored telephone number is displayed and dialled. The outside line is seized automatically. When the other party answers, conduct the telephone conversation in the usual manner.

ANTON

052123456

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Enter the external telephone number with the "0" to seize an outside line. The outside line is seized automatically when you dial.

To keep the old number, press the "esc" key and select a different destination key.

If a telephone number has already been entered when storing, you can clear the old number by pressing the "clear" key.

To add to incomplete telephone numbers when dialling: Press the destination dialling key and then post-dial the additional digits.

2 - 91

2


1 ....

0

&

Y&

?

Y?

Y

Entering a name on the digital keypad

Press digits 1...0, if necessary several times.

Example: 1 =A

11 =B

111 =C

1111 =1

To switch to the next input field or automatically after a time out

To switch to the previous input field: character can be overwritten

Delete the flashing character

To clear the entire entry.

By pressing Y you change between small and capital letters. The display shows

ABC

or abc

.

ABC

1

JKL

4

STU

7

º

DEF

2

MNO

5

VWX

8

. / _

0

GHI

3

PQR

6

YZ-

9

‘

2 - 92

Programming

3

Programming from a PC

After installation, your telephone system is prepared to enable you to immediately conduct telephone calls in the usual fashion and to directly benefit from further advantages of the system.

However, the system allows diverse programming possibilities so you can configure it to suit your very own personal leads.

Without needing to have any knowledge of a programming language, you can program the telephone system from a PC connected via the RS 232 C interface or from a PC with an ISDN card connected via the internal S0 bus. Easily understandable menus guide you through the configuration program. The configuration software is on the included

3.5" diskettes.

Minimum requirements for the PC ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

- IBM or compatible PC with a CPU 80386 or higher (recommended, Pentium)

- 3.5" diskette drive

- Hard disk

- VGA card

- Monochrome monitor

- Windows 98, Windows NT

- Windows 3.1, Windows 95

Installing the configuration program ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

- Insert the 3.5" diskette 1 in drive A. The diskette contains the installation program, a text file with the name READ.ME containing additional information and the telephone system configuration program.

- Start Microsoft Windows.

- Select the "Run" command from the

"Program Manager File Menu".

- Enter a:\setup and press the Enter key.

- When prompted to do so, enter the path and confirm it. All files required are now automatically copied from the diskette to your hard disk.

Connecting a PC to configure the telephone system via the RS 232 interface ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

- Connect the telephone system’s RS 232 interface (D-SUB-9 socket) to the PC’s

COM port. Use a 1:1 V.24 plug - socket extension lead for connection. It must not be longer than 3 m.

- Start the configuration program.

- Configure the telephone system. Your inputs are accepted interactively by menu prompting.

- After completing configuration, remove the cable from the telephone system

Telephone system

(9-pole plug)

2

3

5

7

8

PC

(9-pole plug)

2

3

5

7

8

Telephone system

(9-pole plug)

2

3

5

7

8

PC

(25-pole plug)

2

3

4

5

7

3 - 1

3

Programming

Programming from the system telephone or a/b telephone

After installation, your telephone system is prepared to enable you to immediately conduct telephone calls in the usual fashion and to directly benefit from further advantages of the system.

gramming possibilities so you can configure it to suit your very own personal leads.

The programming instructions with the

S

procedure you can execute on the system telephone and on the a/b telephone.

However, the system allows diverse pro-

Notes on programming with

S

- procedures ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Programming with the

S

-procedure always covers the steps:

Start programming mode, input and exit programming mode.

acknowledge tone if your entry is valid or the error tone if your entry is invalid.

Recommendation: Use a DTMF telephone

(touch-tone dialing) for faster programming.

When programming, pay attention to the dial tones or dial pulses in the handset. Wait after entering every digit until the digit has been dialed. Only then will you hear the

You can press the loudspeaker button instead of "Lift handset" or "Replace handset" when programming on the system telephone.

Starting the programming mode ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

To be able to change settings you must first start the programming mode.

h P S705 Q Pª

Lift handset Start programming mode Enter acknowledge tone or setup code

Replace handset

Enter setup code?

S705

, no setup code is programmed in the telephone system. It is not necessary to enter the setup code.

If you hear the error tone, the last input is wrong. Start the input again from the beginning.

S705

, a setup code is programmed in the telephone system. Enter the setup code in 4 digits. If the code is correct, you will hear the acknowledge tone. If the code is wrong, you will hear the error tone. replace the handset and start the whole input again from the beginning with the correct setup code.

3 - 2

Programming

3

Input example - Call distribution (door call variant 1) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

After lifting the handset first enter a procode

S7

. Then enter one or more phone numbers (e.g. in a call distribution). All entries under a code number must be terminated by replacing the handset.

If you have made a mistake typing the input again from the beginning.

You hear the error tone if you have entered an invalid code number or an invalid phone number.

If you want to delete an entry , simply enter the program code and replace the entry , replace the handset and start the handset.

h P S754 P 11 P12 P

Lift the handset

ª

Replace the handset

Enter code for door call variant 1 Enter the internal phone number

Enter other internal phone numbers, e.g. 12

Acknowledge tone or error tone - If an input is invalid, you hear the error tone immediately. Replace the handset and start the entry again from the beginning.

You will hear the acknowledge tone if all inputs have been clearly terminated after a programming code number and are valid.␣

The message "done" appears in the system telephone display.

If the length of an entry is variable, e.g. the length of an external phone number or number of users of a call distribution, you will not hear any tone. As a check you can terminate the entry with the r

key and will then hear the acknowledge tone.

Exiting the programming mode ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

After you have made all the settings, you exit the programming mode.

At the same time you save the new settings.

These are retained even in the event of a power failure.

h PS700 Q Pª

Lift handset Exit the programming mode Acknowledge tone Replace handset

3 - 3

3

Programming

Reinstating the as-delivered state ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

In the case of an unclear programming, you can reinstate the as-delivered state (delete memory).

Delete memory - Attention! All existing connections are cleared. All data are deleted.

Waiting time approx. 2 minutes!

The programming mode must be started with

S705 h PS709

!

Q Pª

Lift handset Reinstate as-delivered state Acknowledge tone Replace handset

Continue programming or exit programming mode with

S700

!

As-delivered state ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

The followings settings are active in the asdelivered state :

- Line seizure: line seizure "0"

- Analog ports - internal phone numbers

(decade 1 set) and terminal types

AS 190 plus: 11 to 18, telephone




- External access: unlimited for all users

- Call variant 1 (day): on, no internal phone numbers entered, subscribers 11, 12 and

13 are called in the case of call

- Call variant 2 (night): off, no internal phone number entered

- Call forwarding internal: off

- Number of calls: 5

- Don´t disturb: off for all terminals

- Knocking protection: off for terminals

- Transfer of phone numbers to the called party and the caller: on

- Music on Hold (MoH): internal on

- Door call variant 1 (day): on, no internal phone number entered, subscribers 11,

12 and 13 are called in the case of door call

- Door call variant 2 (night): off, Printout of dialed phone number: without

- Automatic dialing: off

- Printout of connection data set: off for all users

- no internal phone number entered: ohne

- Cost limit: no entry

- Own tariff units factor: 0,12 DM

- Base factor (network operator factor):

0, 12 DM

- Cleardown at cost limit: off

- Setup code: off

- Cost code: no entry

- Switch box code: no entry

- Least Cost Router (LCR): off, for all subscribers

- Busy on busy: off

AS 141 plus, AS 191 plus: Transfer of

"0" to dial from call list at internal S0 port: off

- Charge pulses 16 kHz

AS 141 plus, AS 191 plus with system telephone ST 25 or ST 30

- Status display: off

- Cost display: off

- Display: German

- Call list: off

3 - 4

Programming

3

Determining what you want to program

The following tables aim to make it easier for you to make plans. The better you plan the definitions for your system, the greater the benefit for you and other users. The filled in tables help you also to reinstate the desired programming in the event of a fault.

It is best to fill in the tables with a pencil or to use copies.

Determining the system features and phone numbers ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Definitions for analog terminals ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

3 - 5

3

Programming

Definitions for the internal S0 port (AS 141 plus, AS 191 plus) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Internal phone numbers at the internal S0 port

Internal phone number

ISDN telephone

ISDN answering machine

ISDN fax

Definition of the call variants (day, night, call forwarding) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

3 - 6

Programming

3

Definition of the door call variants (day circuit, night circuit - AS 141 plus,

AS 191 plus) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Door hands free unit (TFE)

Internal phone numbers

Bell push 1, door call variant 1 (day circuit) rings

Bell push 1, door call variant 2 (night circuit) rings





1: 2:

Bell push

3:

Determining the relay functions (AS 141 plus, AS 191 plus) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

N. B.:If a port is programmed to connect an audio module, the relay R4 is automatically assigned to the audio module.

If a door hands free unit (FTZ 123 D12) is connected, the relays R3 and R4 are used to connect the door hands free unit and the door opener.

3 - 7

3

Programming

Definition of the external access ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

3 - 8

Programming

3

Definition of the external accesses ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Definition of the regional and barred numbers ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Barring device

Regional number 1 (max. 6 digits)










Barred number 1 (max. 6 digits)










3 - 9

3

Programming

Connection type/External phone numbers/Call variants

The telephone system automatically recognises whether you are connected to a

PTP (Point To Point) or PTMP (Point To Multipoint).

Enter the following for the basic access of the PBX.

1. External numbers of your basic access.

- for PTMP a multiple subscriber number

(MSN) without dialing code (prefix)

- for PTP a system trunk number without code and without direct dialing number

"0"

- for PTP-DDI the system trunk number and a chosen extension number of according

PTP access.

2. Call variants (AVA)

- call variant 1 (day time service)

- call variant 2 (night service)

- call variant 3 (call forwarding internal)

Call variants (AVA):

Call variant/programming

You can define three call variants (call distributions) for every entered external phone number.

Call variant 1/call variant 2

- If an external subscriber dials an external phone number of the telephone system, its call is signaled according to the presently activated call variant 1 or 2. One or more subscribers are called simultaneously which are defined in this call variant.

The call variants 1 and 2 can be switched at any time from every internal or external telephone (see "Switching call variant").

The telephone system calls for a call variant when dialing:

- a multiple subscriber number (MSN)

- the station phone number plus extension number "O" (Global Call)

- the system phone number plus special direct dialing (PTP-DDI)

In the as-delivered state the Global Call is the direct dialing number "0". The Global

Call (max. 3 digits) can be set in the programming on the PC.

When dialling an invalid DDI number, the caller hears the busy tone.

- Call variant 3 (call forwarding internal)

- You can determine to which internal subscriber the call is forwarded when a call is not answered.

- For this case define after how many rings calls are to be forwarded. Calls are forwarded immediately if the subscriber or subscribers of an external phone number are busy.

Call variant 3 is only active if it is switched on. You can switch the AVA 3 on/off on the a/b telephone with

!19

and on the

/

S540

Execution of functions is described overleaf.

3 - 10

Programming

3

System port - Entering the system phone number ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS792PZ PRQPª

Lift handset Program the system phone number

Enter the system phone number, max. 11-digit,

Conclude input,

Acknowledge-

Replace handset without pre-dialing code and ment tone without direct dialing number


S700

Q

ª

System port - Entering special direct dialing (PTP-DDI) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS793PZ PRQPª

Lift handset Program special direct dialing

Enter direct dialing number,

Conclude input,

Acknowledge-

Replace handset max. 3 digits ment tone


S700

Q

ª

Multiport - Entering the multiple subscriber number ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS794PZ PRQPª

Lift handset Program multiple subscriber numbers (MSN)

Enter multiple subscriber number, max. 11 digits,

Conclude input,

Acknowledge-

Replace handset without pre-dialing code

Continue programming or end programming mode by entering ment tone h

S700

Q

ª

Deleting external phone number (system phone number or multiple subscriber number) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª

Lift handset Delete external 1 = delete all Enter external Conclude input, Replace phone number 0 = delete single external phone no phone nos.

that are to be

Acknowledgement tone handset deleted


S700

Q

ª

3 - 11

3

Programming

Defining call variants ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS75PZ PZ P

Lift handset

Define call variants

R PZ

Enter call variant,

Enter external phone number digit 1 for AVA1 (day) digit 2 for AVA2 (night)

(system phone no., spec. direct dialing (PTP-DDI) or MSN) for digit 3 for AVA3 (call forwarding) which you want to define the call variant

PR Q Pª

Conclude input

Enter internal phone numbers one after another which are to be called, max. 5

Conclude input

Acknowledge tone

Replace handset


S700

Q

3 - 12

Programming

3

Defining of the number of rings before call forwarding ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS757PZ PR P

Lift handset

Z

Define number of rings up to call forwarding (AVA3)

Q Pª


(system phone no., spec. direct dialing (PTP-DDI) or MSN) for which you want to define the call variant

Conclude input

Enter number of rings, digits 2 to 8

Replace handset

Acknowledge tone


S700

Q

ª

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

When programming the call variants, you can enter up to 5 internal phone numbers. If more than 5 internal subscribers are to be called, several internal subscribers must be grouped under the same internal phone number in a subscriber group (see

"Programming the internal phone numbers..."). Enter the common internal phone number in the call variant.

If you want to use the telephone system’s switch box , you have to enter the internal phone number of the switch box: Switch box/phone number as the only internal phone number in the call variant of an external phone number (MSN or PTP-DDI).

You can also enter the internal phone numbers of the relays (R1 to R4) in the call variants.

If an audio module is connected to the telephone system, relay R4 is occupied and a call variant may not be entered.

The call variant 3 is only active if it is switched on. You can switch the AVA 3 on/ off on the system telephone with !19

with

S541

/

S540

.

3 - 13

3

Programming

Setting the ringer rhythm for incoming external calls

In order to distinguish between calls to different numbers, the phone numbers in the system can be assigned four different ringer rhythms instead of the normal external call ringer. The ringer rhythms are code rings 1 and 2, supplemented by code rings 3 and 4.

Programming mode must be started with

S705

!

h PS732PZ PR PZ

Lift handset Code for ringer rhythm setting

Enter number End input 1 = Code ring 1

2 = Code ring 2

3 = Code ring 3

4 = Code ring 4

0 = External call

Q ª


Replace handset

Continue programming or quit programming mode with

S700

!

Note ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Ringer rhythms

All ringer rhythms for incoming calls begin with an initial 500 ms pulse, followed by a

2 second pause. This is a technical requirement to allow caller identification (Calling Line

Identification Presentation - CLIP). Thereafter the ring can be programmed differently to distinguish between calls to different extension numbers in the system (see diagram).

External call

Code ring 1

Code ring 2

Code ring 3

Code ring 4

{{{{{{{{{{||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||{{{{{{{{{{||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

. . .

{{{{{{{{||{{||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||{{{{{{{{||{{||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

. . .

{{{{{{{{||{{||{{||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||{{{{{{{{||{{||{{||||||||||||||||||||||||

. . .

{{{{{{{{||{{||{{||{{||||||||||||||||||||||||||||{{{{{{{{||{{||{{||{{||||||||||||||||||||

. . .

{{{{{{{{||{{||{{||{{||{{||||||||||||||||||||||||{{{{{{{{||{{||{{||{{||{{||||||||||||||||

. . .

Key:

0-------1--------2--------3-------4--------5--------6--------7-------8--------9 s

. . .

{{{{{{{{{{||||||||||{{{{{{{{{{||||||||||{{{{{{{{{{||||||||||{{{{{{{{{{||||||||||{{{{{{{{{{

Ring Pause Ring Pause Ring Continued

The rings may be different, depending on the terminal equipment in use.

The code calls 3 and 4 are not signalled to analog ports that are set to type "radio cell".

3 - 14

Programming

3

Door intercom – Door phone number/Door call variants

AS 190 plus, AS 191 plus:

There are 3 inputs where you may connect potential-free contacts, e.g. door bell contacts or alarm contacts. Every action of the contacts may be signalled to a diversion of internal subscribers (door call variant) or be forward to an external subscriber (door call forwarding).

In the following, the use of the contacts as door bell contacts is described . To every contact one internal number out of the available internal numbers is assigned. This internal door number is used when you want to program a door call forwarding.

In door call variant 1 (day time service) and door call variant 2 (night service) you define which subscribers are called simultaneously when the bell push is pressed.

The door call variant can be switched at any time from every internal or external telephone (see "Switching call variant").

Defining a door call number ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS786PZ PZ Pª

Lift handset Define number of rings

Enter bell push

1. 2 or 3


00 = delete internal

Replace handset phone number


S700

Q

ª

Defining door call variants ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS75PZ PZ P

Lift handset

Z

Define door call variant

Pª

Enter call variant digit 4 for AVA 1(day) digit 5 for AVA 2 (night)

Enter bell push

1. 2 or 3

Enter internal phone numbers of the users one after another which are to ring, max. 5

Replace handset


S700

Q

ª

3 - 15

3

Programming

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

defined under by entering the first decade. You can freely select internal phone numbers from the internal phone number block for the port.

Example: Decade 1 is prescribed. You can dial internal phone numbers between 11 and 59.

When programming the door call variants, you can enter up to 5 internal phone numbers. If more than 5 internal subscribers are to be called, several internal subscribers must be grouped under the same internal phone number in a subscriber group (see

"Internal phone numbers for analog ports").

Enter the common internal phone number in the door call variant.

3 - 16

Programming

3

Internal phone numbers for analog ports

You can assign two internal phone numbers (1st and 2nd internal phone number, primary and secondary internal phone number) from the phone number list

(max. 49 internal phone numbers) to every port for analog terminals. You can form several user groups by assigning several users the same 1st or 2nd internal phone number.

Example: All positions at an order center are to be reachable under a direct dialing number but every single position should be also reachable under its individual phone number.

If you have assigned a 1st and 2nd internal phone number to an analog port, the settings which you have made under the 1st internal phone number are valid for this port.

Defining internal phone numbers for analog ports ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS780PZ PZ PZ

Lift handset Define internal phone numbers for analog ports

Q Pª

Enter port number (1 to 8)

Enter 1st internal phone number

00 = delete internal phone number

Enter 2nd internal phone number if necessary

Acknowledge tone Replace handset


S700

Q

ª

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

defined under

S702

by entering the first decade. You can freely select internal phone numbers from the internal phone number block for the port.


If you do not want to define a 2nd internal phone number, you replace the handset already after entering the 1st internal phone number without acknowledge tone.

Delete internal phone number - Enter

00 instead of the internal phone number.

Internal phone numbers ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Decade

1

4

5

2

3

Phone number list

11 to 59

21 to 69

31 to 79

41 to 89

51 to 99

Number

49

49

49

49

49

3 - 17

3

Programming

Terminal types for analog ports

You must program the terminal ports according to the connected terminal type .

Certain features are possible or restricted depending on this programming.

Telephone : All functions are possible.

You can switch on the knocking protection individually.

A call with the service ID" Fax" is not signaled, independently of a call distribution.

Answering machine : The definition as an answering machine allows anyone to take over a call from this port. The knocking protection is also switched on for this port.

Telefax : This definition means that a call to this port does not generate a knocking tone if it is presently busy. The call cannot be picked up. In addition the appropriate service "Fax" is transmitted. Calls with the

"Fax" service ID are signaled at this port, independently of a call distribution.

Modem : This definition means that a call to this port does not generate a knocking tone if the telephone is presently busy.

The call cannot be picked up.

Combi-device : A combi-device is a telephone with integrated fax and answering machine. At the combi-port, a call is generally placed where it is to be signaled after the set call distribution, independently of the sent service ID.

When seizing the line with "0" you use the "Telephony" service. In line seizure with "10" you use the "Telefax" service.

The definition "Combi-device" means that a call to this port does not generate a knocking tone if the telephone is presently busy.

Radio cell : A port defined as a radio cell is designed for connecting multienvironment and multilink-capable cordless phones. You can agree two different code calls with the users of a radio cell.. If the radio cell is called with the 1st internal phone number, all users of the radio cell hear the code call 1. Code call 2 is used under the 2nd internal phone number.

Call back and call, diversion cannot be used in radio cells.

Audio module : A port defined as an audio module is designed for connecting an audio module or a loudspeaker system to the telephone system. You can make an announcement through the audio module or the loudspeaker system. With the definition "Audio module" relay 4 is automatically assigned to the audio module. The audio module or the loudspeaker system is switched through relay 4 when an announcement is made.

The definition "Audio module" means that a call to this port does not generate a knocking tone.

3 - 18

Programming

3

Defining terminal types for analog ports ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS781PZ PZ QP

Lift handset

ª

Replace handset

Define terminal types for analog ports

Enter port number (1 to 8)

Enter digit for terminal type

1 = Telephone

2 = Answering machine

3 = Fax

4 = Radio cell

5 = Modem

6 = Combi-port

7 = Audio module

Acknowledge tone


S700

Q

ª

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You can only define one port as the audio module!

3 - 19

3

Programming

Programming the internal phone numbers and terminal types for the internal S0 port

AS 141 plus, AS 191 plus - To enable the

ISDN terminals to be reached specifically at the S0 port, you have to assign the internal

S0 port internal phone numbers from the phone number list.

The max. 8 internal phone numbers for the internal S0 port are so to speak the multiple subscriber numbers under which the ISDN terminals can be reached at the internal S0 port.

You must enter the internal phone numbers

(MSN) at the ISDN terminals.

At the internal S0 port, only two internal phone numbers can be called simultaneously. If several ISDN terminals are to be called, you must assign these ISDN terminals the same internal phone numbers

(group formation).

Defining internal phone numbers for the internal S0 port ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS782PZ PZ QPª

Lift handset

Define internal phone numbers for the internal S0 port

Enter position

(1 to 8)

Enter internal phone number, acknowledge tone

00 = delete internal

Replace handset phone number


S700

Q

ª

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

defined under

S702

by entering the first decade. You can freely select internal phone numbers from the internal phone number block for the position.


Delete internal phone number - Enter

00 instead of the internal phone number.

3 - 20

Programming

3

Defining terminal types for the internal S0 port ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS783PZ PZ QP

Lift handset

ª

Define terminal types for the internal S0 port

Enter position

(1 to 8)

Enter digit for terminal type

1 = Telephone

2 = Answering machine

3 = Fax

Acknowledge tone

Replace handset


S700

Q

ª

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

A call of an ISDN an answering machine can be taken by any telephone.

An ISDN PC fax card is called independently of the entry in a call variant. if an incoming fax has a fax ID.

You can also use a PC with ISDN card for the services answering machine/fax and enter the phone numbers set up in the PC software.

3 - 21

3

Programming

Relays


R3, R4)

You can make diverse use of the potentialfree relay contacts. Examples:

- activating a door bell (e.g. door gong),

- central bell (signaling an external call)

- second bell (signaling a call for an internal user),

- switching contact,

- pulse contact (e.g. for an additional door opener).

By programming you determine for each relay whether it is to operate as a pulse relay

(3 seconds on) or as an on/off relay.

You can assign two internal phone numbers from the phone number list like any terminal.

You can control the internal phone numbers from any telephone. Externally you dial the switch box of the telephone system to do this. After entering a code you can switch the relays with code numbers.

N. B. :

If a port is programmed for connecting an audio module, the relay R4 is assigned to the audio module.


Do not determine internal phone numbers for this relay.

Defining internal phone numbers of the switching relays ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS784PZ PZ PZ

Lift handset Define the internal phone numbers of the switching relay Q Pª

Enter relay numbers 1, 2, 3, 4

Enter 1st internal phone number,


Enter 2nd internal phone number if necessary

Acknowledge Replace handset tone


S700

Q

ª

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

defined under

S702

by entering the first decade. You can freely select internal phone numbers from the internal phone number block for the position.

Example: decade 1 is prescribed. You can dial internal phone numbers between 11 and 59.

If you do not want to define a 2nd internal phone number, replace the handset after entering the 1st internal phone number without waiting for the acknowledge tone.

Delete the internal phone number -

Enter

00

instead of the internal phone number.

3 - 22

Programming

3

Defining function of the switching relay ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q


Lift the handset Define function of the switching relay

Enter relay number 1, 2, 3, 4

1 = on/off relay

0 = pulse relay 3 s acknowledge tone

Replace handset


S700

Q

ª

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Function

Door bell

Central bell

Internal phone number any, entry in door call variant any, entry in call variant on/off

3 s door call o

Pulse relay

1 s door call

(door gong) o

Second bell

Switching contact

Pulse relay

Audio module

(relay R4) o = any x = setting like internal user none none none o

x x o

-

x

An external power supply is necessary for activating a door, central or second bell and an additional door opener.

Note the load capacity of the relay contacts:

30 VDC/1 A, 125 VAC/500 mA

3 - 23

3

Programming

External access /Barred numbers

Normally every user can telephone all over the world.

However, you can define for every telephone how far it can be used for telephoning:

1 unlimited (non-restricted)

2 national

3 regional (the regional numbers must be entered additionally)

4 local calls

5 answer incoming calls only (semirestricted)

Irrespective of the external access 1 to 4 you can additionally define for every subscriber whether or not he can dial barred numbers

(defined under "Barred numbers").

Programming external access ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q


Lift handset Define external authorization Enter internal phone number

Enter external authorization 1, 2, 3, 4

Replace handset or 5, acknowledge tone


S700

Q

ª

Assigning barred numbers ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª

Lift handset

Assign barred numbers Barred numbers

Enter internal phone number,

Replace handset acknowledge tone


S700

Q

ª

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

As-delivered state: Authorization 1

(unrestricted) for all users.

The phone numbers from the phone book can be dialed by all users irrespectively of the defined authorization.

Phone numbers from the phone book which are also defined as barred numbers cannot be dialed by subscribers with the "Barred numbers on" feature.

3 - 24

Programming

3

External access

You define for every subscriber with which external phone number(s) of the telephone system he can set up an outgoing external connection. The costs are registered under this external phone number which is communicated to the called party.

You define the access for one or more external phone numbers of the telephone system for every subscriber: preferred – this external phone number is communicated automatically on seizing the outside line or preferred with "0" non-restricted – this external phone number can be selected for outside line seizure by the subscriber. On the system telephone by pressing the "MSN/External key" or on the analog telephone by entering

S00


If the subscriber has access to several external phone numbers, the first assigned external phone number is communicated at outside line seizure or with "0".

barred – this external phone number is barred for the subscriber.

Defining access for outgoing external phone number/s ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS731PZ

0 = barred

1 = non-restricted

2 = preferred

3 = all barred

4 = all non-restricted

PZ P

Lift handset External access Access


(

Z PR QPª

Enter external phone number for access 0,

1, 2

Conclude input

Acknowledge tone

Replace handset


S700

Q

ª

3 - 25

3

Programming

Local network code

Enter your local network code. It is then no longer necessary to enter the local network code when you store short dialing destinations in your local network. When the phone number is transferred the local network code is added automatically.

Enter the local network code ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS723PZ PR QPª

Lift handset Enter the local network code number

Enter the local network code

Conclude input

Acknowledge tone

Replace handset


S700

Q

ª

3 - 26

Programming

3

Internal phone number offset

A maximum of 49 internal phone numbers are available in the telephone system. You define the 1 st decade with which the internal phone numbers begin.

N. B.! At the system port of the telephone system, your internal phone numbers

(direct dialing phone numbers) must be in the phone number block which the network operator has assigned for your system port.

Define the decade (1 to 5) with which the internal phone number must begin.

Examples: Phone number block according to network operator - 10 to 29.

Determine decade 1. You can assign the internal phone numbers 11 to 59 freely to every terminal, the relay, the switch box and the door hands free unit (door).

Phone number block 80 to 99. Determine decade 5. Internal phone numbers 81 to

99.

1. Defining the 1st decade of the internal phone numbers ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS702PZ Q Pª

Lift handset Define the 1 st decade of the Enter 1 st decade (digit Acknowledge Replace internal phone numbers 1...5) with which the internal phone numbers tone handset begin


S700

Q

ª

Internal phone numbers ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

4

5

2

3

Decade

1

Phone number list

11 to 59

21 to 69

31 to79

41 to 89

51 to 99

Number

49

49

49

49

49

3 - 27

3

Programming

Music on Hold (MoH)

Determine whether the held user is to hear music during refer back and handover.

If you select the internal music on hold, you will hear a sequence of 8 melodies.

If you select the external music on hold music or information can be played by a audio unit (CD player or cassette player) connected to the telephone system.

N. B.! The played melodies must not violate the rights of third parties (GEMA-free).

Determine music on hold (MoH) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS72PZ Q Pª

Lift handset Determine music on hold

Enter digit

0 = no MoH

1 = internal MoH

2 = external MoH

Acknowledge tone

Replace handset


S700

Q

ª

Notes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Set the volume of the external music on hold on the audio unit. For setting or checking set up an external connection to an internal user of the telephone system. The external connection is held if the internal user presses the refer back key "R" or the

"Brokering" key. You hear the music on hold and can set the volume accordingly.

You cannot adjust the volume of the internal music on hold.

3 - 28

Programming

3

Switch box – Internal phone number

You can dial the switch box of the telephone system from an external source abd control the following functions of the telephone system:

- switch call variant on/off

- set up and switch on/off ISDN call forwarding

- perform room supervision

- switch relays on/off

- set up and switch diversions through the telephone system on/off

In order to be able to use the switch box you must assign an internal phone number to it. At the PTP this internal phone number is the DDI of the switch box. At the PTMP you have to enter the switch box call number as a single internal call number in the call distribution (call variant) of an external phone number (MSN).

Please see the appropriate functions in chapter 1 (Operation – analog / ISDN terminals) for operation of the switch box.

Defining internal phone number of the switch box ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS787PZ Q Pª

Lift handset

Define internal phone number of the switch box

Enter internal phone number,




S700

Q

ª

3 - 29

3

Programming

Regional numbers (free range)

In the external access authorization you can define how far a user may telephone. If you have programmed "Regional" there, you must define up to 10 pre-dialing codes

(max. 6 digits) here which belong to your regional area.

If for example you enter 022, the user with regional access authorization 3 may only dial the pre-dialing codes which begin with

022.

- He may dial , e.g.: 0221, 0228, 02241,

02228.

- He may not dial, e.g. 0211, 0231, 0288.

Entering regional numbers ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS761PZPZPRQPª

Lift handset Define regional numbers Enter regional no. position 1,

2 ... 9, 0

Enter the predialing code max. 6 digits

Conclude input,


Replace handset


S700

Q

ª

Deleting regional numbers ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS760PZ Q Pª

Lift handset Delete regional numbers

Enter regional no. position 1,

2 ... 9, 0

Acknowledge tone

Replace handset


S700

Q

ª

3 - 30

Programming

3

Barred numbers

You can bar 10 phone number ranges.

Phone numbers which begin with these numbers may not be dialed. The restriction applies for all users of the telephone system, independently of the external call authorization.

Entering barred numbers ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS771PZPZPRQPª

Lift handset Define barred numbers

Enter barred number position 1,

2 ... 9, 0

Enter barred number max. 6 digits

Conclude input,


Replace handset


S700

Q

ª

Deleting barred numbers ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS770PZ Q Pª

Lift handset Delete barred number Enter barred number position 1,

2 ... 9, 0

Acknowledge tone

Replace handset


S700

Q

ª

3 - 31

3

Programming

Protecting telephone system functions against unauthorized use (code number)

You can protect some of the functions of your telephone system against unauthorized use by codes.

Cost code - Normally everyone can have the total connection costs of all users displayed or deleted. You can protect this function with a code: the call costs can only be deleted when you enter the 4 digit code.

No cost code is defined in the as-delivered state.

Setup code - Normally every user can program.

by

!

9

or

S7

so that these functions can only be used after a 4 digit code has been entered.

You can switch the setup code on or off and change it. In the as-delivered state the code is always 2850, these are the middle keys from top to bottom. The setup code is switched off.

If you forget the code you have entered you cannot make a setup. In this case you have to consult your dealer. Only he can reset the code.

Switch box code - You can dial the switch box of your telephone system externally, e.g. switch the relays or perform a room monitoring. You can protect the switch box against unauthorized access with the 4-digit switch box code. No switch box code is defined in the as-delivered state.

Entering codes ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!9*

Start function. Note the display. If the setup code is requested after pressing 9, you must enter the code in 4 digits.

Setup code define

$

Confirm with "enter"

Setup code on: 1 off:>0<

"$

Setup code change

$

"

Switch on: "1"Switch off: "0", confirm with

"enter"

"enter", the current setup code is displayed, delete with "clear" if necessary

Enter the 4-digit setup code, e.g. 1234

Setup code

2580

Setup code

1234

$&

Confirm with "enter", scroll with "next"

Cost code define

$

"

Confirm with "enter", the current code is displayed

Enter the 4-digit cost code , e.g. 5678 or

"clear" to delete the code.

Cost code

----

Cost code

5678

3 - 32

Programming

3

$

&

$

"

!


Scroll with "next" to define the switch box code

Confirm the selection with "enter", the current code is displayed

Enter 4-digit code, e.g. 4567 or e "clear" to delete the code


Cost code define

Switch box code define

Switch box code

----

Switch box code

4567

Defining the setup code ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS7261PZ Q Pª

Lift handset

Define setup code

Enter setup code in 4 digits

Acknowledge tone

Replace handset


S700

Q

ª

Deleting the setup code ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS7260 Q Pª

Lift handset Define setup code Acknowledge Replace tone handset


S700

Q

ª

Enter setup code?

, no setup code is programmed in the telephone system. It is not necessary to enter the setup code.

, a setup code is programmed in the telephone system. Enter the setup code in 4 digits. If the code is correct, you will hear the acknowledge tone. If the code is wrong, you will hear the error tone. replace the handset and start the whole input again from the beginning with the correct setup code.

3 - 33

3

Programming

Defining the cost code ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS7281PZ Q Pª

Lift handset Define cost code Enter cost code in 4 digits

Acknowledge tone

Replace handset


S700

Q

ª

Deleting the cost code ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS7280 Q Pª

Lift handset

Delete cost code Acknowledge Replace handset tone


S700

Q

ª

Defining the switch box code ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS7251PZ Q Pª

Lift handset

Define switch box code Enter switch box code in 4 digits

Acknowledge tone

Replace handset


S700

Q

ª

Deleting the switch box code ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS7250 Q Pª

Lift handset Delete switch box code Acknowledge tone

Replace handset


S700

Q

ª

3 - 34

Programming

3

Start configuration with switched on setup code ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Representation in these instructions:

!9#

Note the display: If the setup code is requested after pressing 9, you must enter the code in 4 digits.

The procedure is shown in detail below.

Maintenance/test enter next esc

Detailed description of the same procedure:

Start function

!9

"

Setup code

Digit: ____

System features define

&

Enter the 4-digit setup code; it is set to 2580 in the as-delivered state

(The number does not appear in the display)

- If you make a typing error the following message appears:

"

Input error, enter set esc

"

"enter" to enter the code again.

"next": scroll further to the "

Maintenance/ test

" menu.


3 - 35

3

Programming

Adjusting the flash time

Analog telephones with tone dialling need a flash key, among others, to transmit calls (R key or Signal key). To adapt the telecommunications system to the different flash times of the telephones you can program the flash time range for your analog extension in the system. You will find the flash time of your telephone in the telephone’s technical specifications.

To test whether the set flash time is correct:

- Set up an external call.

- Press the Flash key.

- If you hear the internal dial tone the time is correctly set.

- If the connection is cut the flash time is programmed too short in the system.

Adjusting the flash time for your own extension ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

!

h PS788PZ

Lift handset Code for flash time adjustment Enter code for flash time range

2 = 50 to 200 ms

3 = 50 to 300 ms

4 = 50 to 400 ms

5 = 50 to 500 ms

6 = 50 to 600 ms


S700

!

Q Pª


Replace handset

3 - 36

Programming

3

Setting the charge pulse

The charge pulse the PBX sends to analog telephones may be switched from 16 kHz to

12 kHz.

The analog phones available in Germany usually use the 16 kHz-pulse.


S705

!

h PS719PZ PQ Pª

Lift handset Code for charge pulse setting 1 = 16 kHz

2 = 12 kHz


Replace handset


S700

!

3 - 37

3

Programming

Maintenance/testing

These functions must only be executed by a service technician.

- Display of the system type and of the software version number

- Setting the countrycode

- Service number define

- System restart (all user data is loaded anew into the RAM).

In this way, in certain circumstances an error can be remedied. All data stored by the user is left unchanged!)

- Clearing the memory (

caution: all data is cleared.

Each system has the "as-delivered" settings.)

A system restart and clearing of the memories result in waiting times of around 2 minutes. The display also goes off briefly and programming is ended.

Running the maintenance and test program ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!9#

Initiate the function. Pay attention to the display: You must enter the 4-digit setup code if it is prompted after you enter the number 9.

Version display

$

(

&

The software version number and the system type are displayed.

Initiate the function.

AS140 plus V 1.0

esc

Version display

Country show

&

$

"

$

&

Scroll further. The countrycode can be modified by a service technician ("as-delivered" settings: Germany).

Scroll further. Service number, which is able to remote control, configure or download new software after your permission (

!*

).

An already defined service number if necessary delete or change.

Enter the service number


Scroll further to the "restart" menu

Service number define


Service number

0987654321


Restart enter next esc

3 - 38

Programming

3

$

&

$

$

(

"enter": system restart (reset)

(All user data is loaded anew into the RAM and programming is ended automatically) or

"next": scroll further to the "clear memory" menu

"enter": Initiate clearing of the memory (resetting the system to the "as-delivered" state. A safety prompt follows.

"enter": confirm clearing of the memories if you really wish to clear.

The memories are cleared (approximately 2 minutes). (All data is cleared and programming is ended automatically.) or "esc": return to the start of the program

-- 00:00

----------------

Clear memory enter next esc

Confirm enter esc

Clear memory

Please wait

-- 00:00

----------------


!

"enter": return to the maintenance and test program


Resetting the telephone system (analog terminals / ISDN terminals) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS734 Q Pª

Lift handset Reset the telephone system Acknowledge tone Replace the handset

The reset is performed.

Deleting the memory (analog terminals / ISDN terminals) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS709 Q Pª

Lift handset Delete memory (reset to the as-delivered state)


The memory is deleted.

3 - 39

3

Programming

Registering the system telephone ST 25 digital

Two digital system telephones can be connected to every internal ISDN bus

(internal S0 bus) of an AGFEO ISDN telecommunications system.

During configuration of the telecommunications system, a primary internal telephone number, and possibly a secondary internal telephone number, from the number repertoire of the telecommunications system is assigned to each digital telephone, just like any other terminal.

You must register the digital system telephone when you connect it to the telecommunications system for the first time.

If you unplug a registered digital system telephone from the internal S0 bus and connect it to the same internal S0 bus (slot) later on again, you do not need to register it again.

You must register the digital telephone again if you connect it to a different internal

S0 bus.

The internal numbers may also be changed afterwards.

Registering internal phone numbers of the digital system telephone ¢¢¢¢¢¢

!9#6

The assigned primary internal telephone numbers of the two digital system telephones, e.g. 13 and 14, are then displayed.

ST 25 digital

Slot 1 >13<14

&

ST 25 digital

Slot 1 13>14<

$

Press "next" to select the next internal telephone number, e.g. >14<

Press "enter" to register the digital telephone under the marked internal telephone number. The display goes off briefly and then this message briefly appears.

The standard display is then shown. The digital system telephone is registered and is ready for operation.

ST 25 digital

Registering

-- 11:52

19.March 1999

3 - 40

Programming

3

Remote setting - remote configuration

By means of "remote setting - remote configuration", your specialist dealer can program your telephone system according to your wishes, without having to travel to your house, and simply through your S0 basic access. In doing so, data protection is always guaranteed.

To allow remote maintenance, you should enter into the telephone system the "remote service number" your dealer uses or the "service number" your service center

(under

!9#

) uses to maintenance.

Remote service is only possible if the entered number agrees with the communicated phone number.

You also decide when and what is allowed to be programmed. For example, you decide whether the phone numbers in the phonebook can be read and written.

If you have allowed remote service, your specialist dealer can read out, modify and write back your telephone system’s programming. Remove service remains allowed for 8 hours, after which it is again automatically disabled. For remote service, you may have to end your programming.

Remote setting - remote configuration ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!*

Initiate the function.

Enter number

"

$

&

Enter the remote service number (programming phone number)

Press "enter" to confirm. Decide whether remote service is to be allowed without access to the central abbreviated dialling data or by pressing "next", whether remote service is to be allowed completely.

Enter number

01234567890

Remote service hidden names

Remote service complete

!

Conclude selection by pressing "set". Remote service is allowed for 8 hours.

Entering the programming phone number ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS473PZ Pª

Lift handset Enter phone number Replace handset Programming phone number

Allowing remote service ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

h PS47PZ

1 = without name

2 = complete

Q Pª

Lift handset Start remote service Enter phone number Acknowledge tone

Replace handset

3 - 41

3

Programming

Downloading new firmware

The AGFEO ISDN telecommunications system can be updated to the latest firmware version without tampering with the telecommunications system hardware.

You can download the new firmware into the telecommunications system via a PC connected to the telecommunications system’s serial RS 232 C interface. If your telecommunications systems has an internal

S0 bus, you can also download firmware via a PC featuring an ISDN card connected to the internal S0 bus.

Minimum PC requirements ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

- IBM or compatible PC with a CPU 80386 or higher (recommended, Pentium)

- 3.5" diskette drive

- VGA card

- Monochrome monitor

- Windows 3.1, Windows 95, Windows 98,

Windows NT

- the complete "TK-SOFT" software package from AGFEO must be installed on your PC (operating instructions programming from a PC)

Connecting a PC via the RS 232 C interface ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

- Connect the telecommunications system’s

RS 232 interface (D-SUB-9 socket) to the

PC’s COM port.

For connection, use the PC cable belonging to the telecommunications system or

Telephone system

(9-pole plug)

2

3

PC

(9-pole plug)

2

3

5 5 a one-to-one V.24 extension cable featuring a male and a female connector

(mouse or joystick extension cable). It must not be more than 3 m long.

Telephone system

(9-pole plug)

2

3

5

PC

(25-pole plug)

2

3

4

5

7

8

7

8

7

8

7

Backing up the telecommunications system data ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

- Start the "TK-Set" configuration program on your PC

- Read all data out of the telecommunications system (F8).

- Save the data on the hard disk or on a diskette.

- Transfer, if necessary, the call data using the program "TK-Bill".

- Save the LCR-table.

Downloading new software ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

- Insert the included "firmware Upgrade" diskette in drive A.

- Copy the

Asxxx.exe

file from the diskette into a directory (e.g. AGFEO) on your PC’s hard disk. This file unpacks itself auto matically when you run it (by double clicking it). After unpacking, the directory (e.g.

AGFEO) contains the files:

-

ASxxx.abf

- ASxxx.bin

3 - 42

Your specialist dealer can also remotely download the new firmware by ISDN into your telecommunications system.

Programming

3

- Copy the unpacked files into the "Updates" subdirectory of the TK-Soft directory on your hard disk (by default: under

"C:\TKSoft").

- Start the "TK-Flash" update program (by default: in the "C:\TKSoft" directory).

Refer to the online help for details of how to operate "TK-Flash".

The new firmware is now loaded into the telecommunications system. You cannot make any telephone calls during the load operation (approximately 5 minutes). You can observe the load process on the PC’s monitor.

- End

"

TK-Flash

".

- Clear the telecommunications system’s memory from the system telephone or from an a/b telephone.

Clearing the memory from a system telephone* ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

!9#

Initiate the function. Pay attention to the display: if the setup code is prompted after you press the key 9, you must enter the code as four digits.

Versionsnummer ansehen

&&

...

"next": moves you to the "clear memory" menu.

Speicher löschen enter next esc

$

"enter": initiates clearing of the memory (the system is reset to the "as-delivered" settings); this is followed by a safety prompt.

bestätigen enter esc

$ "enter": confirms clearing of the memory if you really wish to clear it.

Speicher löschen

Bitte warten

The memories are cleared (approximately 2 minutes). (All data is deleted and programming is ended automatically.)

-- 00:00

1.Januar 1999

Deleting the memory (analog terminals / ISDN terminals) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

The programming mode must be started with h

S705

Q

ª h PS709 Q Pª

Lift handset Delete memory (reset to the as-delivered state)


The memory is deleted.

Loading the telecommunications system’s system data ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Copy the stored system data back from the

PC into the telecommunications system.

The telecommunications system now operates with the new firmware.

3 - 43

3

Programming

Programming for advanced users

You can reach each program directly by pressing

!

and by entering the program number. You do not need to remember the program numbers. If you are experienced with programming trees, you can also navigate in the programming tree by pressing the

$

and

&

keys.

The programming tree is illustrated on the next pages.

Rules for working with the programming tree ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

You initiate programming by pressing the

!

key. If necessary by pressing the & key several times, you can then reach the program point you are looking for.

Every program has a program number. With this number, you can move directly to every program point, e.g. "do not disturb" has the number 12 (1 from the first level and 2 from the second) and you can move directly to "do not disturb" by pressing "set 12".

!

Initiate programming

Function menu

&

Scroll to the next program point

&

Y&

Scroll to the next program point

Move back by one program point

Settings of telephone

FP keys/device

Name change

Settings of telephone

!12

( or enter the required program number, e.g. 12, do not disturb

Move back by one level

(

!

Cancel programming: Press "esc" several times or end programming "set"

Dont dist. 11/-int: 1 ext: 2

Do not disturb on/off

-- 11:52

----------------

-- 11:52

----------------

3 - 44

Programming

3

Programming tree

!

1 Function

& $

2 System telephone settings

3 Keys/name

1 Call variant 2/door call variant 2 (night service, on/off)

2 Do not disturb .....................

(internal/external on/off)

3 Telephone lock ....................

(lock telephone, on/off)

4 Call waiting prevention .........

(on/off)

5 Appointment .......................

(time/date and activate)

6 Wake up .............................

(time, on/off)

7 Diversion to (to internal user/external subscriber, on/off)

8 Diversion from .....................

(from internal user, on/off)

9 Call forwarding ....................

(Call forwarding, call variant 3, on/off)

0 Room monitoring .................

(on/off)

* Autodial ..............................

(on/off)

# Busy on busy .......................

(MSN, on/off)

1 Tone ringing volume .............

(set)

2 Tone ringing tone ................

(set)

3 Display contrast ....................

(set)

4 Automatic microphone activ. .

(on/off)

6 Headset volume ....................

(set) - ST 25 only

5 Listening volume ..................

(set)

7 Telephone code ...................

(enter)

8 Cost display .........................

(display of call charges/time)

9 Status display .......................

(display of status/date)

0 Language changeover ..........

(german/english)

*

Call list ................................

(on/off/with names only)

# Direct access (automatic/

"0" outside line seizure) ......

(on/off)

1 Modify function key assignments ......................

2 Modify user names .............

Destination key ..................

(phone number/name)

4 Destination dialling

5 Abbreviated dialling/ phonebook

7 Costs

8 ISDN functions

1 Add phonebook entry ........

(phone number/name)

2 Modify phonebook entry .....

(phone number/name)

3 Clear phonebook entry .......

(phone number)

4 Enter emergency numbers ...

(phone number)

5 Enter direct number ............

(phone number)

6 Enter autodial ....................

(phone number)

1 Display own call costs

2 Display/delete call costs ........

(costs of user)

3 Print call costs .....................

(print costs of user/MSN/S0)

4 Cost recording Start ............

(user)

5 Costs recording Stop ...........

(user)

1 ISDN call forwarding ..............

( permanently/on busy/if no answer)

2 Phone number communication to the called party ................

(on/off)

3 Phone number communication to the caller .........................

(on/off)

3 - 45

3

Programming

9 Set up telecommunications system

* Remote service

# Version

* Code .................................

1 Setup code (on/off, modify)

..........................................

2 Cost code

..........................................

3 Switching box code

# Maintenance/test ...............

1 Software version number

..........................................

2 National variant

..........................................

3 Service number

..........................................

4 System restart

..........................................

5 Clear memories

..........................................

(restore "as-delivered" settings)

..........................................

6 ST 25 digital registering (ST 25 only)

Remote service....................... (remote service number/without

names/complete)

Version ..................................

(system type/version)

3 - 46

Annex

4

Glossary

Seizure

Seizure of an outside line (B channel) to call an external subscriber.

Call variant

The internal phone numbers of the terminal that are rung in the event of an external call are defined in a call variant.

Different call variants can be defined for the day or the night service.

Call variant 1 (day time service) and call variant 2 (night service) can be switched over at any time from any telephone.

Services

In ISDN, a service identifier (e.g. telephony, fax) is transmitted whenever an ISDN subscriber calls. A connection is then established to the caller if the called terminal has the same service identifier. This prevents incorrect connections between two different terminals (e.g. telephone/fax).

Terminals

These are devices which you as an internal user may connect to the telephone system.

Analog devices - telephones, system telephones, answering machines, fax machines, combined units (telephone, fax and possibly answering machine in one unit), modem.

ISDN terminals - ISDN telephones and ISDN cards in a PC.

External

Telephone calls in a telecommunications system are distinguished as external and internal calls. External calls are local, longdistance or international calls for which you must pay charges to your telephone company. Connections between terminals of your telephone system and terminals on your external point-to-multipoint connection are also external connections, which incur local charges.

Radio cell

You can connect any approved cordless telephone to the analog ports of your telephone system. If you operate several hand-held units on the base station, it is possible to agree on two different code calls with the users of this radio cell. If the radio cell is called via the first internal phone number, all users of the radio cell hear the code call 1 ringing sequence. If it is called via the second internal phone, they hear the code call 2 sequence. The user with whom you have agreed a code call accepts the call.

Outgoing external connection

This is a connection to an external subscriber that is established from a terminal of the telephone system by seizing an outside line, (e.g. by dialling "0") and by dialling an external phone number.

Pulse dialling

Every dialled digit is assigned a defined number of interruptions. You hear these interruptions in the receiver when dialling.

Internal

With regard to telephone calls in a telephone system, a distinction is made between internal and external calls.

Internal calls are the calls that you make free of charge within the telephone system

(with other users of the telephone system).

ISDN (Integrated Services Digital

Network)

All services (voice and data) can now be transmitted in one network.

Incoming external connection

Connection to a terminal of the telephone system that is established by an external subscriber via the telephone system’s phone number.

4 - 1

4

Annex

Configuring

Setting (programming) the telephone system’s functions from a PC using a configuration program.

Dual tone multifrequency dialling

(DTMF)

Every dialled digit is assigned a specific tone.

Telephones that operate on the basis of this dialling method require a signal key (inquiry key R)/flash function on the telephone system.

MoH (music on hold)

A waiting external subscriber hears music on hold while the connection is placed on hold, e.g. a call is being forwarded.

MSN (Multiple Subscriber Number)

A multiple subscriber number is an ISDN phone number for a point-to-multipoint connection. In Germany, for example,

Deutsche Telekom provides three multiple subscriber numbers free of charge for your telephone system.

NTBA (Network Termination for ISDN

Basic Access)

The telephone company lays its copper cables up to this access point (S0 basic access). Here, you connect the telephone system via a point-to-point or a point-tomultipoint connection.

Ringing distribution

In the ringing distribution settings, you define which terminals of the telephone system are to ring in the event of a call. Is only one terminal to ring or are several terminals to ring at the same time?

Ringing distribution settings for calls from the outside are:

Call variant 1 (day time service), call variant

2 (night service) and call variant 3 (call forwarding).

Ringing distributions for calls from the door

(door hands free unit TFE): door call variant

1 (day) und door call variant 2 (night).

Call forwarding

A call from an external location that has not been accepted within a specific time is forwarded. The terminals of the telephone system that are defined in the call forwarding settings then ring. The time up to call forwarding can be set.

Switching box

You can call up your telephone system’s switching box from an external location and, by post-dialling a code, you can switch the relays of your telephone, you can switch the call variants, you can set up a diversion or you can monitor a room, for example. From an external location, you reach the switching box on a point-to-point connection by means of a direct dialling in number or, on a point-to-multipoint connection, by dialling a separately assigned multiple subscriber number (MSN). With the switching box code, you can protect the switching box against unauthorised access.

Signal key R (inquiry)

This is a key on the telephone that you must press if you with to inquire with another user during a conversation. The signal key must have a flash function, i.e. it must produce a brief interruption.

Door hands free unit

This is a door station with a bell push and a door opener that you can connect to the telephone system. From the telephone, you can speak with a visitor at the door and you can open the door.

Outside line (B channel/S0 basic access)

You can connect an external S0 basic access to your ISDN telephone system. Every external S0 basic access behaves like two conventional analog outside lines.

Therefore, you have two outside lines (B channels) on which you can make external calls (local, long-distance or international calls).

4 - 2

Annex

4

If something should ever not function

Checks ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

- In the event of malfunctions on the telephone system, please check your operating actions by referring to the instruction manual.

nals and of the telephone system are inserted correctly.

- If you cannot remedy a malfunction, your dealer will be please to help you.

- Check whether the connectors of termi-

Deactivating the special dial tone ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

When you lift the receiver on your standard telephone, you hear the special dial tone.

You hear the special dial tone when do not disturb, automatic dialling or a diversion is active.

You can deactivate all functions that result in a special dial tone by entering a code.

h PS69

Lift the receiver Deactivate special dial tone functions

Q Pª



Power failure ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

- If the power should fail, you can make neither external nor internal telephone calls.

- Initiated return calls are cleared.

- Connections parked in the telephone system are cleared.

When the power returns:

- The telephone system functions again according to the previously set program.

All settings made via the programming mode or the PC program remain stored provided the programming mode was ended appropriately.

- The redial entries are cleared.

- The total connection charges and the connection records are stored.

4 - 3

4

Annex

What to do in the event of malfunctions

Malfunction

Telephone system programming unclear

No dial tone after Power failure lifting the receiver

Terminal defective

Incorrect installation

No internal calls arrive

No external calls arrive

Check mains connection/fuses

Check terminal on another connection

Check connections at the connection socket and on the telephone system

Turn off do not disturb Do not disturb

(special dial tone)

Diversion to another telephone (internal/ external) (special dial tone)

Turn off diversion to

Do not disturb

(special dial tone)

Turn off do not disturb

Diversion to another telephone (internal/ external) (special dial tone)

Turn off diversion to

Deactivate ISDN call forwarding ISDN call forwarding is active

Point-to-point connection: System phone number missing

Enter the system phone number

Forwarding an external call

(inquiry) is not possible

Possible causes

Point-to-multipoint connection:

- MSN missing

- MSN-internal user assignment missing

The inquiry key r

on the telephone is set as an earth key

Wrong flash time

Remedy

Reset the telephone system

Reset the telephone system to the

"as-delivered" settings and reprogram it

Enter the MSN

Assign the internal user to the MSN

(ringing distribution)

Set the telephone to DTMF and set the inquiry key to flash

Adjust flash time on the phone or on the respective port of the PBX.

4 - 4

Annex

4

Malfunction Possible causes

Distorted speech S0 bus incorrectly connection installed

Connection error

Remedy

Connect wire pairs correctly

Resetting the telephone system ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

By resetting, you can restore the telephone system’s programming to a defined state.

This may be necessary if you wish to reset unclear settings or if you wish to reprogram the telephone system.

After a reset, the telephone system again operates according to the previously set program. All settings made in the programming mode or by means of the PC program are retained provided the programming mode has been ended properly.

Important: the following are cleared when you reset the telephone system.

- All existing internal and external connections

- Remote support

- Internal return calls

- ISDN callback on busy

- Outside line reservations

Hardware reset - unplug the 230 V power mains plug and then plug it in again.

Software reset - carry out the following procedure:

Software reset (analog terminals / ISDN terminals) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢


S705

Q

ª h PS734 Q Pª

Lift the receiver Reset the telephone system

Acknowledgement tone, reset is triggered


The reset is performed.

Software reset (system telephones) ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

! 9 # & & & $

4 - 5

4

Annex

Rings

External call

External call

Code ring1

Code ring 2

Code ring 3

Code ring 4

Internal call

Door ringing

All ringer rhythms for incoming calls begin with an initial 500 ms pulse, followed by a 2 second pause. This is a technical requirement to allow caller identification (Calling Line Identification Presentation - CLIP).

Thereafter the ring can be programmed differently to distinguish between calls to different extension numbers in the system (see diagram).

. . .

{{{{{{{{{{||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||{{{{{{{{{{||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

An external subscriber calls

{{{{{{{{||{{||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||{{{{{{{{||{{||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

. . .

. . .

{{{{{{{{||{{||{{||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||{{{{{{{{||{{||{{||||||||||||||||||||||||

. . .

{{{{{{{{||{{||{{||{{||||||||||||||||||||||||||||{{{{{{{{||{{||{{||{{||||||||||||||||||||

. . .

{{{{{{{{||{{||{{||{{||{{||||||||||||||||||||||||{{{{{{{{||{{||{{||{{||{{||||||||||||||||

. . .

{{{{||||||||||||||||||{{{{||||||||||||||||||{{{{||||||||||||||||||{{{{||||||||||||||||||

An internal user calls

{{{{||||||||||||||{{{{||||||||||||||{{{{

A visitor rings at the door

Code call rings to radio cells

- Code ring 1

- Code ring 2

. . .

{{{{{{{{||{{||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||{{{{{{{{||{{||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

Call via the first internal phone number

. . .

{{{{{{{{||{{||{{||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||{{{{{{{{||{{||{{||||||||||||||||||||||||

Call via the second internal phone number

{{{{||||{{{{||||{{{{||||{{{{||||{{{{

Outside line reservation /

Appointment call (system telephone)

. . .

Wake up call

(system telephone)

{{{{||||{{{{||||{{{{||||{{{{||||{{{{||||{{{{||||{{{{||||{{{{||||{{{{||||{{{{||||{{{{||||

1 minutes rising volume

0-------1--------2--------3-------4--------5--------6--------7-------8--------9 s

. . .

Key:

{{{{{{{{{{||||||||||{{{{{{{{{{||||||||||{{{{{{{{{{||||||||||{{{{{{{{{{||||||||||{{{{{{{{{{

Ring Pause Ring Pause Ring Continued

Note ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Ringing may differ depending on the terminal used. The code calls 3 and 4 are not signalled to analog ports that are set to type "radio cell".

4 - 6

Annex

4

Tones

Dial tone

- Internal

- External

{{||{{||{{||||||||||||{{||{{||{{||||||||||||{{||{{||{{||||||||||||{{||{{||{{||||||||||||

Signals that you may dial after lifting the receiver

. .

{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{{

.

Continuous tone that you hear when you have seized an outside line after dialling "0" or after pressing an MSN key

. .

.

.

Ringing tone

- Internal

- External

Busy tone

{{{{||||||||||||||||||{{{{||||||||||||||||||{{{{||||||||||||||||||{{{{||||||||||||||||||

Internal user is rung

. . .

{{{{||||||||||||||||{{{{||||||||||||||||{{{{||||||||||||||||{{{{||||||||||||||||{{{{||||

External user is rung

. . .

{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||

The dialled internal user or external subscriber is busy

. . .

||{}||{}||{}{{}{}{}{}{||||{}||{}||{}{{}{}{}{}{||||{}||{}||{}{{}{}{}{}{||||{}||{}||{}{{}{

Signals that you may dial after lifting the receiver, but that do not disturb, autodial or diversion is on

. . .

Special dial tone

Call waiting

(knocking) tone

- Internal/door

- External


Error tone

- a/b

telephone

- System

telephone

Key:

{{{{

During a call, this tone signals an internal call or a door call

{{||||{{||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||{{||||{{|

. . .

During a call, this tone signals an external call

{{{{

Input accepted

After 10 seconds

{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||||{{||

Operating error/input rejected

. . .

{{

Operating error/input rejected

0--------1--------2-------3--------4--------5------- 6-------7--------8--------9 s

{{{{{{{{{{||||||||||{{{{{{{{{{||||||||||{{{{{{{{{{||||||||||{{{{{{{{{{||||||||||{{{{{{{{{{

Ring Pause Ring Pause Ring

. . .

Continued

4 - 7

4

Annex

4 - 8

List of key words

L


A

Accepting calls 1 - 4, 2 -21

Acknowledgement tone 4 -7

Activating /deactivating call variant 3 1 - 14, 2 -37

Actuating a door opener 1 - 41, 2 -75

Advice of Change.

See

Connection costs

Allocation of names

...to users 2 -61

Analog terminals I -8, 3 - 5

Announcement 1 - 15, 2 -40

Answering machine 3 - 19, 3 - 21

...picking up a call 1 - 11, 2 -29

Appointment call 2 -70

As-delivered state 3 - 4

...reinstating 3 - 4, 3 - 39, 3 - 43

Audio module 2 -40, 3 - 7, 3 - 18

Autodial 1 - 16, 2 -41

Automatic call back 2 -24

Automatic outside line seizure 1 - 2, 2 -9

Automatic redial 2 -87

B

B channel.

See

Outside line

Baby call.

See

Direct call

Barred numbers 3 - 24, 3 - 31

Barred range 1 - 3, 2 -20

Base station 1 - 3, 2 -17

Brokering 1 - 29, 2 -52

Busy on busy 1 - 17, 2 -42

Busy tone 4 -7

C

Call by Call 1 - 23, 2 -10, 2 -54

Call charges 1 - 3

Call Deflection 2 -39

Call diversion.

See

Diversion from/to

Call external subscriber 1 - 1, 2 -17

Call forwarding 1 - 48, 2 -80, 3 - 13, 4 -2.

See

Diversion to

...for extensions on the point to point connection

2 -39

Call Hold (HOLD).

See

Hold (ISDN)

Call internal user 1 - 2, 2 -17

Call list

...display 2 -32

...enter in 2 -31

...entry in 1 - 8

...on/off 2 -8, 2 -31

Call variant 3 - 3, 3 - 4, 3 - 6, 3 - 7, 3 - 12, 4 -1

...programming 3 - 10

...switching over 1 - 13, 2 -35

Call waiting announcement 1 - 8

...reject 1 - 5, 2 -26

Call waiting announcement tone 1 - 4, 4 -7

Call waiting prevention 1 - 10, 2 -10, 2 -28

Call waiting tone 1 - 8

Callback 1 - 30

Callback on busy 1 - 31, 2 -59

Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR).

See

Communicating a phone number

Calling the door station 1 - 41, 2 -75

Charge pulses 1 - 52

Charges.

See

Connection costs

Checks in case of malfunction 4 -3

Clear memory 3 - 4

Code call 1 - 3, 2 -17, 3 - 18

Code numbers 3 - 32

...cost code 3 - 32

...setup code 3 - 32

...switching box code 3 - 32

Code ring 3 - 14, 4 -6

Combi-device 3 - 18

Combination port 1 - 1

Communicating a phone number 1 - 1, 1 - 43

...on the internal SO bus 1 - 42

...on/off 1 - 43

Communication of the charge pulses 1 - 52

Conference 1 - 21, 2 -48

Configuring 4 -2

Connected Line Identification Presentation

(CLIP).

See

Communicating a phone number

Connecting a PC 3 - 1, 3 - 42

Connection assignment

...PC cable 3 - 1

Connection costs

...defining a limit/cleardown 1 - 53

...displaying 1 - 52

...displaying and deleting 2 -82

...displaying your own costs 2 -84

...example of printout 1 - 55

...print and delete totals 1 - 54

...printing 2 -83

...starting and stopping recording 2 -86

Connection data set

...notes 1 - 50

...setting and printing the printout 1 - 50

Connection ID 1 - 25

Cordless telephones 1 - 3

L - 1

L

List of key words

Cost code 1 - 32, 3 - 32

...programming 3 - 32

Cost display 2 -6

Cost limit 1 - 53

...cleardown at 1 - 53

Country code 3 - 38

CTI - computer telephony integration I -10

D

Date 2 -7

Decade 3 - 27

Defining a door call number 3 - 15

Defining decade of internal phone numbers 3 - 27

Defining door call variants 3 - 15

Destination dialing - Storing and dialing phone nu

2 -90

Destination key

...private 2 -90

Destination memory

...private 2 -11

...public 2 -11, 2 -90

Dial tone 4 -7

Dialling method I -8

Dialling with the receiver on the hook 2 -20

Direct access 2 -9

Direct call (Baby call)

...dial 2 -69

...entering number 1 - 36, 2 -65

Direct dialing number 3 - 11

Display 2 -1, 2 -3

...internal phone number 2 -3

...setting the contrast 2 -5

...status 2 -3

Diversion from 1 - 44, 2 -77

Diversion to 2 -78

...through the ISDN exchange 1 - 47, 2 -80

...through the telephone system 1 - 45, 2 -78

Do not disturb 1 - 12, 2 -33

Door call 4 -6

...accepting 1 - 41

...diversion to an external subscriber 2 -74

...picking up 1 - 41, 2 -75

Door call variant

...switching over 1 - 40, 2 -73

Door hands free unit 4 -2

DTMF dialling method I -8

DTMF post dialling 1 - 3, 2 -20

Dual tone multifrequency dialling (DTMF) 4 -2

E

F

Emergency call

...dial 2 -69

...entering phone number 2 -64

Enter codes 3 - 32

Enter system phone number 3 - 11

Entering names 2 -61

Error tone 3 - 2, 4 -7

Extended redial 2 -87

External 4 -1

External access 3 - 25

External call 4 -6

External call authorization 2 -86

External phone numbers of the telephone system

3 - 10

Fallback 1 - 23, 2 -51

Fax 3 - 18

Features I -2

Firmware

...downloading new software 3 - 42

Flash time 3 - 36

Follow me.

See

Diversion from

Forwarding

...a call during ringing 2 -39

...external 1 - 6, 2 -24

...internal 1 - 6, 2 -23

...of an outside line 2 -25

Free range 3 - 30

Function keys

...changing assignment 2 -12

...overview 2 -10

G

Global Call 3 - 10

Group formation 3 - 20

H

Hand free 2 -20

Hands free microphone automatically on 2 -5

Hash key I -8, I -9

Having callers identified 1 - 20

Headset 2 -10

...volume 2 -5

Hold (ISDN) 1 - 19, 2 -46

L - 2

List of key words

L

I

ISDN

...placing a connection on hold 2 -46

Identifying malicious callers 1 - 20, 2 -47

Incoming external connection 4 -1

Inquiry 1 - 29, 2 -58

...in the room 1 - 29, 2 -58

Installing the configuration program 3 - 1

Internal 4 -1

Internal call 4 -6

Internal phone number

...display 2 -3

...on/off 3 - 27

...programming for internal SO port 3 - 20

...switch box 3 - 29

Internal phone numbers 3 - 17

...defining for switching relays 3 - 22

ISDN 4 -1

...call deflection 2 -39

...call forwarding 1 - 47, 2 -80

...callback on busy 1 - 31, 2 -59

...communicating a phone number 1 - 43, 2 -76

...holding a connection 1 - 19, 2 -46

...identifying malicious callers 2 -47

...parking (replug on the S0 bus) 1 - 25, 2 -55

...PC fax card 3 - 21

...telephones I -9

...terminals I -9

...three-party conference 1 - 21, 2 -49

K

L

Keys I -11

Language changeover 2 -8

Least Cost Routing (LCR) 1 - 23, 2 -51

Limit.

See

Connection costs defining a limit

Line seizure/with "0" 3 - 4

Local network code 3 - 26

Locking/unlocking the telephone 1 - 35, 2 -68

Loudspeaker system 2 -40, 3 - 18

M

Maintenance/testing 3 - 38

Malfunctions 4 -3

Malicious Call Identification (MCID) 1 - 20, 2 -47

Manual line selection.

See

MSN define specific

Memory storing a phone number 2 -53

Messages 2 -60

Modem I -8, 3 - 18

MSN (Multiple Subscriber Number) 1 - 1, 4 -2

...define specific 1 - 3, 2 -18

Multipoint connection 1 - 25, 2 -55

Multiport 3 - 11

Music on Hold 3 - 28, 4 -2

...externally 3 - 28

...setting the volume 3 - 28

...switch internally 3 - 28

Muting 1 - 29, 2 -58

N

Names 2 -61

Network code 1 - 23, 2 -51, 2 -54

Network provider 1 - 23, 2 -51, 2 -54

NTBA 4 -2

O

P

Outgoing external connection 4 -1

Outside line 4 -2

Outside line reserving 1 - 3, 2 -19

Outside line seizure

...automatic 1 - 2, 2 -9, 2 -17

...direct 1 - 2

...on the combination port 1 - 1

...setting 1 - 1, 2 -9

...with "0" 1 - 3

...with ‘0’ 2 -18

...with define MSN 1 - 3, 2 -18

Overview of functions I -2

Parking 1 - 24, 2 -55

...in the telephone system 1 - 24

Partial Rerouting 2 -39

Phone book

...alphabetical 2 -66

...changing a number 2 -63

...dialling numbers 2 -66

...numeric 2 -66

...programming phone number 2 -62

...storing a number 1 - 34

Phone numbers 3 - 17

...decade 3 - 17

L - 3

L

List of key words

...direct dialing phone number 3 - 27

...phone number block 3 - 27

...phone number list 3 - 17

Picking up a call 1 - 11, 2 -29

Picking up a call from an answering machine 2 -29

Pictograms I -11

Point-to-point connection 1 - 2

Post-dialling 1 - 3, 2 -20

Post-dialling digits 1 - 3

Power failure 4 -3

Preparing dialling 2 -20

Programming

...from a PC 3 - 1

...from the a/b telephone 3 - 2

...from the system telephone 3 - 2

Programming code exiting 3 - 3

Programming external access 3 - 24

Programming mode starting 3 - 2

Programming tables 3 - 5

Programming tree 3 - 45

...rules 3 - 44

Protective measures I -4

Pulse dialling 4 -1

Pulse dialling method I -8

R

Radio cell 1 - 3, 1 - 44, 3 - 18, 4 -1

Redial

...automatic 2 -87

...extended 2 -87

Regional numbers 3 - 30

Rejecting a call during ringing 2 -39

Relays 3 - 23

...assigning internal phone numbers 3 - 22

...switching 1 - 28, 2 -57

Remote configuration 3 - 41

Remote control

...call forwarding 1 - 48

...call variant 3 1 - 14

...diversion to 1 - 46

...door call diversion 1 - 38

...relay on/off 1 - 28

...room monitoring 1 - 26

Remote setting 3 - 41

Reserving an outside line 1 - 3, 2 -19, 2 -20, 2 -22

Resetting the telephone system 3 - 39, 4 -5

Ringer rhythms 3 - 14

Ringing distribution 1 - 13, 2 -35, 4 -2

Ringing tone 4 -7

S

Room monitoring 1 - 26, 2 -56

RS 232 interface 3 - 1, 3 - 42

Ruf heranholen 1 - 11

S0 port programming internally 3 - 20

Safety notes I -4

Seizure 4 -1

Service ID 3 - 18

Service number 3 - 38

Services 4 -1

Setting the charge pulse 3 - 37

Setting the ringer rhythm 3 - 14

Setting the tone ringing 2 -4

Setup code 3 - 2, 3 - 32, 3 - 33

Short dialing 3 - 26

Signal key R (inquiry) 4 -2

Software

...displaying the version number 3 - 38

Special dial tone 1 - 12, 1 - 16, 1 - 44, 2 -77,

2 -78, 4 -7

...deactivating 4 -3

...ISDN exchange 1 - 49

Speed dial variant 1 - 33

Standard telephone I -8

Star key I -8, I -9

Status display 2 -3, 2 -7

Status messages 2 -60

Switch box 3 - 29

...code 3 - 33

...phone number 3 - 13

Switching box 4 -2

... diversion to 1 - 45

...call forwarding 1 - 14



...room monitoring 1 - 26

...switch relays on/off 1 - 28

System port 3 - 27

System telephone I -9

...cleaning 2 -2

...display 2 -3

...inserting the marking strips 2 -2

...setting up 2 -2

...settings 2 -4

...ST25 digital, registering 3 - 40

System type

...displaying the system type 3 - 38

L - 4

T

TAPI I -10

Tariff factor

...base factor 1 - 32

...own factor 1 - 32

Telephone 3 - 18

Telephone code 2 -6

...clear 1 - 36

...enter 1 - 35

...program 1 - 35

Telephone lock 1 - 35, 2 -68

Telephone system resetting 3 - 39

Telephoning

...external 1 - 1, 2 -17

...internal 1 - 2, 2 -17

Terminal type

...defining for the internal S0 port 3 - 21

...for analog ports 3 - 18

...for the internal S0 port 3 - 20

Terminals 4 -1

...analog I -8

...ISDN I -9, 3 - 20

Three-party conference (3 PTY) 1 - 21, 2 -48

Time 2 -7

Timer 1 - 37, 2 -72

TK-Phone I -10

Tone ringing

...setting the tone 2 -4

...setting the volume 2 -4

Total counters display 2 -82

Tracing a caller 2 -47

U

User group 3 - 17

V

Voice message 2 -43

W

Wake up call 2 -88

List of key words

L

L - 5

L

List of key words

Copyright ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

Copyright 1999 AGFEO GmbH & Co. KG

Gaswerkstr. 8

D-33647 Bielefeld language in any form, manually or otherwise, using any means whatever. This applies to electronic, mechanical, optical, chemical and other media.

We reserve all rights for this documentation, particularly in the event of patent granting and utility model registration.

Trademarks and company names used in this documentation are subject to the rights of the respectively affected companies.

Neither the entire documentation nor parts of if may be duplicated, transmitted, modified, stored in a database system nor translated to any language or computer

Technical modifications ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

AGFEO GmbH & Co. KG reserves the right to implement, without prior announcement, modifications to depictions and information in this documentation that serve the purpose of technical progress.

This documentation was elaborated with great care and attention and is revised on a regular basis. Despite all checks, it is not possible to rule out the fact that technical inaccuracies and typographical errors may have been overlooked. All errors known to us are rectified in new editions. We are always grateful for information about errors in this documentation.

You can only use the numerous ISDN features of your AGFEO-ISDN telephone system if your network operator has provided you with these features.

L - 6

List of key words

L

Service ¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢

If you have any questions regarding operation of your telephone system which these operating instruction cannot answer, please contact your dealer.

Before calling your dealer you should have a few data on hand for quicker service:

- What telephone system do you have?

- E.g. AGFEO AS 140 plus, AS 191 plus (on the type plate of the system)

- What connection type (PTP and/or PTMP) and which phone numbers do you have?

(is on the registration or confirmation of the network operator)

- What software version do the AGFEO installation diskettes have? (printed on the diskettes)

- What software version does your telephone system have? (can be read out on the PC or system telephone).

- What terminals have you connected to your telephone system? (analog terminals with and without DTMF dialing, ISDN telephones, fax machines etc.)

- Keep the operating instructions of the connected terminals and this manual at the ready.

Start your PC and read out the configuration with TK-Set. Print out the configuration of your telephone system if possible.

L - 7

L

List of key words

This unit fulfills the requirements of the EU guidelines:

91/263/EWG Telecommunications equipment

73/23/EWG

89/336/EWG

Low-voltage devices

Electromagnetic compatibility

This is why your telephone system bears the CE mark.

Ident. No. 534 676

Modifications and errors reserved.

Printed in Germany

1991

L - 8

AGFEO GmbH & Co. KG

Gaswerkstr. 8

D-33647 Bielefeld

Internet: http://www.agfeo.de

Agfeo AS 190 plus/AS 191 plus Operation Manual

Basic-Line plus: AS 140 plus

AS 141 plus

AS 190 plus

AS 191 plus

- Operation

- Programming

¶

¶

Related manuals

AGFEO

AS 190 plus/AS 191 plus

AGFEO

AS 40

AGFEO

AS 40

AGFEO

AS 40

AGFEO

AS 40

AGFEO

AS 40

AGFEO

AS 31 ST

AGFEO

AS 32

AGFEO

business-line AS 32

AGFEO

AS 4000

AGFEO

AS 4000

AGFEO

AS 3x